Samsung Galaxy Note Ii Atandt Users Manual I317 User

NOTE II to the manual a2e7dad3-db59-41ef-9bcb-035e8aec8091

Galaxy Note II (AT&T) - Operating Instructions ATT_i317_Galaxy_Note_II_English Free User Guide for Samsung GALAXY Series Mobile Phone, Manual - page2

2015-08-20

: Samsung Samsung-Galaxy-Note-Ii-Atandt-Users-Manual-795045 samsung-galaxy-note-ii-atandt-users-manual-795045 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 255 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

4G LTE SMARTPHONE
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
SGH-I317_UM_English_UCALJ2_WC_110912_F5
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product, including but not limited to 'PowerTOP' and 'e2fsprogs', incorporate source code
covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and
other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com
.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to
www.samsung.com/us/safe
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited
warranty, please refer to
www.samsung.com/us/safe
, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™
devices are sold. [101212]
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System) at:
http://www.samsung.com/us/support.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Toll Free Tel:
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsungusa.com
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license
from SRS Labs, Inc.
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com
for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX
videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap
Apps >
Settings > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register
). Go to
vod.divx.com
for more information on
how to complete your registration.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.
TM
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be
used and protected.
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit
http://www.att.com/privacy
.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to
hear and be
heard
™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.
How Does It Work?
•
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.
•
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise -
from both ends of a call.
•
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.
•
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,
without worrying about surrounding noise.
1
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ............................ 6
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . . 12
Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go . . . . . . . . 12
Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . 13
Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ....... 15
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
S Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Section 3: Call Functions ............................ 49
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . 52
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Section 4: Entering Text ............................. 67
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . 67
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad . . . . . . 68
Using ABC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2
Entering Text Using Handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Samsung Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature . . . . . . .70
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address
Book ..........................................................73
AT&T Address Book Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Joining Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Managing Address Book Contacts . . . . . . . . . . .83
Section 6: Multimedia .................................86
AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Music Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Google Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Camera Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Section 7: Messaging ................................106
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . 106
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . 109
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Using Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3
Messages App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Section 8: Changing Your Settings .......... 121
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
More Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Blocking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Power Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Location Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Lock Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
One-handed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Back up and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
S Pen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Developer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Section 9: Connections ............................. 157
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Section 10: Applications ........................... 174
AllShare Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
AT&T Code Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
AT&T FamilyMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
AT&T Ready2Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
DeviceHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Kies air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Music Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
myAT&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Paper Artist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Polaris Office 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
S Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
S Suggest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
YPmobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Section 11: Health and Safety
Information ............................................ 205
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . 205
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . 215
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . 223
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . .226
Section 12: Warranty Information ............ 228
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
End User License Agreement for Software . . . .233
Section 13: Samsung Product
Registration ............................................ 241
Index ........................................................... 242
Getting Started 6
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to start using your phone by first
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then
setting up your voice mail.
Setting Up Your Phone
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM
into their corresponding internal compartments. The
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal
area.
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into
the slot on the top of your phone (1).
2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.
Caution!
Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.
Doing so may damage the cover.
Installing the SIM Card
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many
others features.
7
Important!
The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,
so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach
of small children.
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket
(as shown) until the card locks into place.
•
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned
as shown.
Note:
If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot
if the SIM is not detected.
Installing the Battery
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Incorrect
Correct
Getting Started 8
Removing and Installing the Memory Card
You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other
devices.
Note:
Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB
memory card.
Installing the Memory Card
Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as
shown).
•
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and
the card is securely inserted.
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”
on page 47.
Removing the Memory Card
1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.
2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.
Correct
9
Installing the Back Cover
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)
and press down (2).
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you
have a secure seal.
Note:
Make sure the battery is properly installed before
switching on the phone.
Charging a Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers.
Getting Started 10
Note:
You must fully charge the battery before using your
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges
fully in approximately 4 hours.
Note:
Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, web browser use, and other variables may
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.
Although you can use the phone while the battery is
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.
Using the Travel Charger
Important!
Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to
connection. If the battery is not properly installed
and the wall charger is connected, the handset
may power off and on continuously, preventing
proper operation.
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a
standard AC wall outlet.
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from
the interface connector jack on the phone.
Correct
Incorrect
11
Warning!
If your handset has a touch screen display, please
note that a touch screen responds best to a light
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and
void the warranty. For more information, refer to
“Standard Limited Warranty” on page 228.
Note:
Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause damage to the phone.
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone
automatically turns off.
Switching the Phone On or Off
1. Press and hold until the phone switches
on.
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the
phone.
Note:
The display language is preset to English at the factory.
To change the language, use the Language menu. For
more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 121.
Getting Started 12
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold ,
until the
Device options
screen displays.
4. Tap
Power off
to switch off the phone.
5. At the
Power off
prompt, tap
OK
.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch
Screen
1. Press to lock the touch screen.
2. Press again to display the lock screen then
swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.
Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go
When you turn on your phone for the first time, you will be
prompted to setup the AT&T Ready2Go feature.
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure
Wi-Fi and many more features.
1. When the
Fast & Easy Phone Set-Up
screen displays,
tap
Select Language
if you want to change the default
language.
2. Touch
Get Started
to begin.
– or –
Touch
Cancel
to set up your phone later. You can
access Ready2Go by tapping
Applications
➔
AT&T
Ready2Go
.
3. Read and follow the instructions on each screen.
Creating a Samsung Account
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing
applications such as ChatON and AllShare Play. If you did not
create a Samsung account when you first set up your phone,
follow these steps:
1. From the home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Add account
.
2. Tap
Samsung account
.
3. Tap
Create new account
.
4. Tap
Terms and conditions
to read them and tap
OK
.
5. Tap the
I accept all the terms
above
checkbox.
6. Tap
Privacy policy
and read the policy and tap
OK
.
7. Tap
Agree
.
8. Enter the required information and tap
Sign up
.
9. At the Welcome screen, tap
Next
.
10. Follow the on-screen instructions to verify your email
address and activate your account.
13
Creating a New Google Account
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
If you did not create a new account during the setup
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these
steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Gmail
.
The
Add a Google Account
screen displays.
2. Tap
New
to create a new Google account.
– or –
If you already have a Google account, tap
Existing
to
sign in and add the account to your phone.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google
Account.
Note:
Once you have created a Google account, you only need
to sign in.
Retrieving your Google Account
Password
A Google account password is required for Google
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and
navigate to
http://google.com/accounts.
2. Click on the
Can’t access your account?
link.
3. Tap the
I don’t know my password
radio button.
4. Enter your Email address and click
Continue
.
5. Follow the password recovery procedure.
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap .
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a
greeting, and record your name.
Note:
These steps may be different depending on your
network.
Getting Started 14
Accessing Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap .
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the
voice mail center.
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the
asterisk key on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your password.
15
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines some key features of your phone and
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and
provides information on using a memory card.
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
•
4G LTE network with 1.5 gigahertz quad-core processor
•
Android v 4.1.1, Jelly Bean Platform
•
Brilliant 5.5” HD sAMOLED plus display
•
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone
menus and options including applications and seven home
screens
•
Virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
•
Ready access to the Internet
•
Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi
®
technology
•
USB Tethering-capable
•
Mobile Hotspot Capability
•
8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with 2 Megapixel Front
Facing camera
•
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation
•
HSDPA 7.2 mbps high speed download capability
•
Up to 32 GB expandable memory slot
•
16 GB memory and 2 GB RAM
•
Corporate and Personal Email
•
Sync and update social network applications
•
Over 450,000 Apps available to download via Google Play
Store™
•
Access to Movies and TV Shows with Samsung Media Hub
•
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
•
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and
Instant Messaging with Google Talk™
•
DivX Certified
®
to play DivX
®
video up to HD 1080p, including
premium content
•
AllShare™ Play to share your media content across DLNA
certified devices
Understanding Your Phone 16
Front View of Your Phone
1.
Status light
: displays red when charging, green when
fully charged, blue when powering up, and orange
when a notification has arrived.
2.
External speaker
: allows you to hear the caller.
3. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your
favorite applications on the Home screen.
4. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,
and Apps. For more information, refer to “Primary
Shortcuts” on page 23.
5. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with
additional options for different features and
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Web.
6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice
application.
7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating
a menu or web page.
7
3
2
4
5
8
6
113
12
11
10
9
17
8.
Home screen indicator
: shows which Home screen is
presently displayed.
9. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search
that allows you to search for items on the internet.
10. AccuWeather screen: displays Time, Day, Date,
Temperature and weather conditions for your area.
11. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to
operate your phone, such as the received signal
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,
missed calls, etc.
12.
Front facing camera
: allows you to take pictures of
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to
Self shot.
13.
Proximity and Light sensors
: uses the ambient light
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to
your ear, the touch screen will turn off.
Side Views of Your Phone
5
1
2
4
3
6
Understanding Your Phone 18
1.
3.5mm Headset jack
: allows you to plug in headphones.
2.
Volume keys
: allow you to adjust the ringer volume
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly
press down either volume key ( ) to mute
the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a
message.
3.
Microphone
: allows other callers to hear you when you
are speaking to them. It is also used for the
Speakerphone.
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations.
5. Power/Lock key: ( ) lets you power your
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the
touch screen. For more information on locking your
phone, see “Locking and Unlocking the Phone” on
page 37.
6.
Microphone
: used for noise cancellation and stereo
recording.
Rear View of Your Phone
1.
Camera lens
: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.
2.
External speaker
: allows you to hear when the
Speakerphone is turned on.
3.
S Pen
: a stylus that assists you in performing different
functions.
4.
Flash
: is used to provide adequate light when taking
pictures in dark places.
2
4
1
3
19
S Pen
The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different
functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having
to switch between touch and pen input.
1.
Pen button
: by pressing the Pen button, you can add
functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer
to “Using the S Pen” on page 20.
2.
Stylus tip
: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the
screen.
Rich S Pen Functionality
•
Air View
: Hover S Pen over the screen to preview information.
•
Effectively express yourself
: Write/Draw directly into an email,
or the calendar, annotate Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF
documents, capture your ideas in S Note, write a note on the back
of the picture.
•
Quick Command
: Launch Quick Command to activate frequently
used applications or actions. Press the S Pen button and then
drag the S Pen up the screen to display the Quick Command
window.
•
Easy Clip
: Instantly outline and crop anything on the screen and
freely edit or share with others.
1
2
Understanding Your Phone 20
Removing the S Pen from your Phone
The S Pen is stored in your phone to make it easier to keep
track of.
To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:
1. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of
the S Pen out of the phone (1).
2. Pull the S Pen out of the phone (2).
Using the S Pen
There are several different functions you can perform by
using the S Pen.
Back Button
To move to a previous screen, hold the S Pen button and
touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration below.
The previous screen displays.
Press S Pen
Button
21
Menu Button
To display the menu from any screen, hold the S Pen button
and touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration
below. The menu displays.
Launch S Note Lite
S Note Lite is an application that you can launch from any
screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. To open S Note
Lite, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the screen.
To access the full S Note application, see “S Note” on
page 198.
Press
S Pen
button
Press
S Pen
button
Understanding Your Phone 22
Screen Capture
To take a screen capture, hold the S Pen button and tap and
hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved in
the
My Files
➔
All files
➔
sdcard0
➔
Pictures
➔
Screenshots
folder. You can also find them in your Gallery in
the
Screenshots
album.
Write on any Screen after Capture
To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write.
Files are saved in the
My Files
➔
All files
➔
sdcard0
➔
Pictures
➔
Screenshots
➔
IMG_edited
folder.
For information on using your S Pen with the S Note
application, see “S Note” on page 198.
Press and Hold
S Pen button
Draw or Write
23
Air view
When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears
on the screen. Move the pointer to files, subjects, or options
to preview the contents or view information in pop-up
windows.
You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer
to an edge (top/bottom/left/right) of the screen.
Display Layout
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access
to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front
View of Your Phone” on page 16.
Primary Shortcuts
There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that
appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default
shortcuts are:
•
Phone
for dialing a number.
•
Messaging
for creating and viewing Messages.
•
S Note
for
creating notes using the keypad or S Pen
.
•
Internet
for surfing the Internet.
•
Apps
for accessing the applications on your phone.
You can change the Phone, Messaging, S Note, and Internet
application shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Apps
menu.
For more information, refer to “Adding and Removing
Primary Shortcuts” on page 41.
Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s
display and Indicator area:
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is no network available.
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.
Understanding Your Phone 24
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Displays when the S pen has been removed from
the phone.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call is on hold.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Displays when a call has been missed.
Displays when a call has been muted.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
forward. For more information, refer to “Call
forwarding” on page 63.
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is
fully charged.
Displays when your battery is charging. Also
displays battery charge level.
Device Power Very Low – Shows your current
battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power
remaining.
Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and
will immediately shutdown.
Displays when your connection to an EDGE network
is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA,
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.
Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network
is active.
25
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 4G LTE network.
Displays when your phone is downloading or has
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is
installing.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB cable connection.
Displays when the phone is tethered via a
supported USB cable connection.
Displays when a new text or multimedia message
is received.
Displays when a new voice mail is received.
Displays when Email is received.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event
has arrived. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 181.
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified
time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page
183.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired
with the phone.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Understanding Your Phone 26
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a
communication issue with the target Wireless
Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone
is connected to another device.
Displays when your phone as been configured as a
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Displays when your phone is connected to a PC
using Kies air.
Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device
using the AllShare Play application.
Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal.
Displays when data synchronization and
application sync is active and synchronization is in
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when your phone is connecting to the
Device Management server when you first turn on
your phone.
Displays when your device is connected being used
to control streaming media and is connected to a
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified
device using the AllShare Play application.
Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d
between your device and an external Web storage
location.
Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was
successfully delivered.
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.
Displays when the keypad is active.
Displays when an emergency call is taking place.
27
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
“Changing Your Settings” on page 121.
Application Icons
The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use
most frequently.
The following table contains a description of each
application. If the application is already described in another
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that
particular section is provided.
For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see
“Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 38.
1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap one of the
application icons.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. To return to the main Home screen, tap .
The following applications are available:
AllShare Play
: AllShare Play allows your phone to
stream photos, music and videos from its memory to
other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified
devices. Your phone can also play digital content
streamed from other DLNA certified devices. For more
information, refer to “AllShare Play” on page 174.
AT&T Code Scanner
: AT&T Code Scanner allows you to
scan 2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and
EAN) barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.
For more information, refer to “AT&T Code Scanner” on
page 178.
AT&T FamilyMap
: provides peace of mind by being able
to conveniently locate a family member from your
wireless phone or PC and know that your family's
location information is secure and private. For more
information, refer to “AT&T FamilyMap” on page 179.
AT&T Locker
: AT&T Locker allows you to store, share,
and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in
one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more
information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 86.
Understanding Your Phone 28
AT&T Navigator
: AT&T Navigator provides you with
access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These
programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn
navigation, but also access local searches based on a
variety of category parameters. For more information,
refer to “AT&T Navigator” on page 179.
AT&T Ready2Go
: AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly
and easily setup your phone by using the web browser
on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import
contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many
more features. For more information, refer to “Setting
up your Phone with Ready2Go” on page 12.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can
maximize your battery performance, maximize your
data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi
networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and track
your data use. For more information, refer to “AT&T
Smart Wi-Fi” on page 167.
Calculator
: Using this feature you can use the phone as
a calculator. The calculator provides the basic
arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a
scientific calculator. For more information, refer to
“Calculator” on page 180.
Calendar
: With the Calendar application, you can
consult the calendar by day, week, month, year, create
events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if
necessary. For more information, refer to “Calendar”
on page 181.
Camera
: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to
produce photos and videos. For more information, refer
to “Camera” on page 97.
ChatON
: With the ChatON application, you can interact
with friends and family with text, images, hand-written
notes and video shared instantly. You can also chat in
groups. For more information, refer to “ChatON” on
page 182.
29
Clock
: The Clock application allows you to access
alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a
timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information,
refer to “Clock” on page 183.
Contacts
: You can manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or
group. You can also synchronize your phone Address
Book with AT&T Address Book, the network backup
service. For more information, refer to “Contacts and
Your Address Book” on page 73.
DeviceHelp
: DeviceHelp provides online information to
help with your device questions. For more information,
refer to “DeviceHelp” on page 186.
Downloads
: The Downloads application allows you to
manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and
the Browser. For more information, refer to
“Downloads” on page 186.
Email
: Email enables you to review and create email
using various email services. You can also receive text
message alerts when you receive an important email.
For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page
113.
Flipboard
: This application creates a personalized
digital magazine out of everything being shared with
you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other
related material. For more information, refer to
“Flipboard” on page 187.
Gallery
: The Gallery is where you view photos and play
back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic
editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as
wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture
message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 94.
Gmail
: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone.
Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail
can automatically synchronize with your Gmail
account on the web. For more information, refer to
“Using Gmail” on page 115.
Understanding Your Phone 30
Google
: The Google Search application is the same on-
screen Internet search engine that is on the Google
Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more
information, see “Google Search Bar” on page 34.
Google +
: Google+ makes messaging and sharing with
your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of
friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your
Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to
automatically upload videos and photos to your own
private album on Google+. For more information, refer
to “Google +” on page 117.
Internet
: Open the web browser to start surfing the
web. The browser is fully optimized and comes with
advanced functionality to enhance the Internet
browsing feature on your phone. For more information,
refer to “Internet” on page 157.
Kies air
: Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on
the same Wi-Fi network. You can view call logs, videos,
photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS
messages from your home computer. For more
information, refer to “Kies air” on page 172.
Latitude
: With Google Latitude, you can see the location
of all of your friends on a map or on a list. You can also
share or hide your location. For more information, refer
to “Latitude” on page 188.
Local
: Local is an application that uses Google Maps
and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,
Bars, Attractions, and more. You can also add your own
locations. For more information, refer to “Local” on
page 190.
Maps
: Depending on your location, you can view basic,
custom, and satellite maps and local business
information, including locations, contact information,
and driving directions. You can also post public
messages about a location and track your friends. For
more information, refer to “Maps” on page 190.
31
Media Hub
: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the
hottest movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase
your favorite content and watch from the convenience
of anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media
Hub” on page 86.
Messages
: AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and
voicemail messages together into a single
conversation thread and is accessible by phone or
computer. For more information, refer to “Messages
App” on page 118.
Messaging
: You can send and receive different types of
messages. For more information, refer to “Messaging”
on page 106.
Messenger
: Messenger allows you to bring groups of
friends together into a simple group conversation.
When you get a new conversation in Messenger,
Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more
information, refer to “Messenger” on page 117.
Mobile Hotspot
: This application allows you to share
your phones’s mobile data connection as a portable
Wi-Fi hotspot. For more information, refer to “Tethering
& portable hotspot” on page 125.
Music Hub
: This app lets you upload your music
collection to the cloud, stream and purchase songs
from an extensive catalog, and listen to personal radio.
For more information, refer to “Music Hub” on page 88.
Music Player
: Music Player allows you to play music
files that you have stored on your phone and memory
card. You can also create playlists. For more
information, refer to “Music Player” on page 89.
My Files
: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,
images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other
memory card data in one convenient location. For more
information, refer to “My Files” on page 192.
myAT&T
: myAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T
account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or
change your rate plan. For more information, refer to
“myAT&T” on page 193.
Navigation
: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS
navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or
speak your destination. For more information, refer to
“Navigation” on page 194.
Understanding Your Phone 32
Paper Artist
: Provides access to an in-device graphics
program.For more information, refer to “Paper Artist”
on page 196.
Phone
: Allows you to access the dialer keypad, call
logs, and favorites. For more information, refer to “Call
Functions” on page 49.
Play Books
: With Google Play Books, you can find
more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of
thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more
information, refer to “Play Books” on page 196.
Play Magazines
: With Google Play Magazines, you can
subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them
available to read on your phone at any time or any
place. For more information, refer to “Play Magazines”
on page 196.
Play Movies & TV
: With Google Play Movies & TV, you can
rent thousands of different movies and television
shows. You can watch instantly, or download your
movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For
more information, refer to “Play Movies & TV” on page
94.
Play Music
:
With the Music application, while online, you can
play music that you have added to your music file as well as
any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can
listen to music you have copied from your PC.
For more
information, refer to “Google Play Music” on page 92.
Play Store
: The Play Store provides access to
downloadable applications and games to install on
your phone. For more information, refer to “Play Store”
on page 197.
Polaris Office 4.0
: Polaris® Office 4.0 is a Microsoft
Office compatible office suite. This application
provides a central place for managing your documents
online or offline. For more information, refer to “Polaris
Office 4.0” on page 197.
S Note
: The S Note application allows you to create
notes using the keypad, the S Pen tool, or both. You can
add images, voice recordings, and text all in one place.
For more information, refer to “S Note” on page 198.
33
S Suggest
: This application recommends popular
applications when connected to a Wi-Fi network. All
recommended applications are guaranteed to be
compatible with your device. For more information,
refer to “S Suggest” on page 198.
S Voice
: With the S Voice application you can use your
voice to perform operations that you would normally
have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number,
texting a message, playing music, etc. For more
information, refer to “S Voice” on page 199.
Settings
: This icon navigates to the sound and phone
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:
display, security, memory, and any extra settings
associated with your phone. For more information,
refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 121.
Talk
: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based
application for instant messaging offered by Google.
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search
a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For
more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 116.
Video Player
: The Video Player application plays video
files stored on your microSD card. For more
information, refer to “Video Player” on page 93.
Voice Recorder
: The Voice Recorder allows you to
record an audio file up to one minute long and then
immediately send it as a message. For more
information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 200.
Voice Search
: The Google Voice Search application
allows you to search the web using only your voice. For
more information, refer to “Voice Search” on page
201.
YouTube
: YouTube is a video sharing website on which
users can upload and share videos, and view them in
MPEG-4 format. For more information, refer to
“YouTube” on page 201.
YPmobile
: The YPmobile (Yellowpages) application
provides quick and ready access to businesses, map
locations, and storage of your favorite searches. This
application allows you to tap into local businesses,
locations, and events, connecting you to your search in
real-time. For more information, refer to “YPmobile”
on page 203.
Understanding Your Phone 34
Tip:
To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-
used applications to the Home screen or to the folders you
created. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen”
on page 40.
Google Search Bar
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet
search engine powered by Google™.
1. From the main home screen, tap the Google Search bar
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want
to search for, then tap .
3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home
screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.
Command Keys
Menu Key
Press
Menu
to display a context-sensitive menu of
options for the current screen or feature.
Home Key
Press
Home
to display the main Home screen. Press
and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task
manager.
Back Key
Press
Back
to return to the previous screen, option or
step.
Terms used in this user manual
Tap
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:
•
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
•
Tap a menu item to select it.
•
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Touch and Hold
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For
example:
•
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
35
•
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe and Palm Swipe
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. Use swipe when:
•
Unlocking the screen
•
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:
•
Capturing the screen
Panning
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:
•
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to
another page.
Tilt
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:
•
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.
Turn over
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For
example:
•
Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone
over.
Using Gestures
By activating the various gesture features within the Motion
Settings menu, you can access a variety of time saving
functions.
To activate motion:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
➔
Motion
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon located at the top of
the screen to activate motion.
3. Tap the checkboxes located to the right of each motion
option to activate the motions you wish. A checkmark
will appear.
ON
Understanding Your Phone 36
Caution!
Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results. To learn how to properly control
motions, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Motion
➔
Learn
about motions
.
The following is a description of the available gestures:
•
Quick glance
: Once enable, you can check key information at a
glance by reaching towards your device.
•
Direct call
: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
device to your ear.
•
Smart alert
: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.
•
Double tap to top
: Once enabled, double tap the top of the
device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list.
•
Tilt to zoom
: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where
content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two
points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to
zoom in or out.
•
Pan to move icon
: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it
detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new
location.
•
Pan to browse images
: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to
pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large
on-screen image.
•
Shake to update
: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for
Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page,
etc.
•
Turn over to mute/pause
: Once enabled, mute incoming calls
and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a
surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.
37
•
Palm swipe to capture
: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form
left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.
•
Palm touch to mute/pause
: Once enabled, you can pause any
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the
screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to
play the current video or unmuting the current sound.
For more information, refer to “Motion” on page 149.
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
To unlock your phone:
1. Press the lock button located on the upper
right side of your phone.
2. The lock screen will display with
Swipe screen to
unlock
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.
4. The Home screen will display as shown above.
Note:
There are several additional ways you can lock your
screen. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen
Settings” on page 136.
Home Screen Overview
The main home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets
to give you instant access to information and applications.
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by
pressing .
Palm Swipe to
Screen Capture
Understanding Your Phone 38
Navigating Through the Home Screens
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place
different applications on each of the home screens.
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each
side.
Navigating Through the Application Menus
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application
Menus:
1. At the Home screen, tap . The first Application
Menu will be displayed.
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two
menus.
3. Tap one of the application icons.
39
Note:
As you add applications, the number of Application
menus that you have available will increase.
Navigating Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,
Contacts, Messaging, or Internet.
To access a sub-menu:
1. Press .
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone
screen.
2. Tap an option.
Accessing Recently-Used Apps
1. Press and hold from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap to go to the Task manager.
– or –
Sub-Menu items
Understanding Your Phone 40
Tap to go to Google Search.
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
•
Creating Shortcuts
•
Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen
•
Repositioning Widgets
•
Creating Folders
•
Changing the Wallpaper
•
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a
feature, action, or launch an application.
Note:
To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the
new screen, then add the shortcut.
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Tap to display your current applications.
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the
Apps
tab.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current page. Once complete, release the screen to
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the
current screen.
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.
4. Tap
Apps and widgets
,
Folder
, or
Page
.
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and
position it on the current screen.
Deleting a shortcut
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it
from its location on the current screen.
41
3. Drag the icon over the
Delete
icon and release it.
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items
turn red.
Note:
This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes
it from the current screen.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
exception of the
Apps
shortcut.
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home
screen.
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you
want to add as the new primary short cut.
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home
screens.
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen
application.
Adding a Widget
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
4. Tap
Apps and Widgets
.
5. Tap the
Widgets
tab at the top of the screen.
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the
current screen, then release the Widget.
Removing a Widget
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around
on the screen.
2. Drag the Widget over the Delete icon and release
it.
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn
red.
Understanding Your Phone 42
Note:
This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just
removes it from the current Home screen.
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap to display your current applications.
3. Tap the
Apps
tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press and tap
View type
.
5. Tap
Customizable grid
. A green circle will appear next
to the option.
6. Press and tap
Edit
.
7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to
move.
8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.
9. Tap
Save
.
10. Press to return to the Home screen.
Creating Application Folders
You can create application folders to hold similar applications
if you wish.
To create a folder follow these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap to display your current applications.
3. Tap the
Apps
tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press and tap
Edit
.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a folder.
6. Drag the icon down to the
Create folder
icon.
7. Enter a folder name and tap
OK
.
A folder is displayed in the original place of the
application icon with the application icon displayed on
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.
8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to
the App info icon to view information on the
application.
9. Tap
Save
.
+
43
Adding a New Page to the Application Menu
You can add a new page to your application menu by
following these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap to display your current applications.
3. Tap the
Apps
tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press and tap
Edit
.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a new page.
6. Drag the icon down to the
Create page
icon.
7. Tap
Save
.
The app will appear on a new page.
Changing the Wallpaper
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home
screens by following these steps:
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty
area of the screen.
The
Home screen
window is displayed.
2. Tap
Set wallpaper
.
3. Select the location where you would like to change the
wallpaper. Tap
Home screen
,
Lock screen
, or
Home and
lock screens
.
4. Tap one of the following options:
• Gallery
: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken
with your camera.
• Live wallpapers
: select an animated wallpaper. This option is
not available for the Lock screen option.
•Wallpapers
: select from many still-life wallpapers.
5. Select a wallpaper and tap
Set wallpaper
,
Done
, or
Cancel
.
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to
seven Home screens.
To add a new Home screen:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press and tap
Edit page
.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains .
A new screen is added.
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to
a different location.
Understanding Your Phone 44
5. Press to return to the main Home screen.
You can now add items to your new Home screen.
To delete a Home screen:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press and tap
Edit page
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the bottom of the
screen. The page will turn red.
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to
delete, the
Delete home screen page
prompt is
displayed.
6. Tap
OK
to delete the page and its contents, otherwise
tap
Cancel
.
7. Press to return to the main Home screen.
45
Moving Home Screens
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you
want.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press and tap
Edit page
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.
In this example, the Dual clock app screen is moved to
the last position.
When you move a Home screen, the other Home
screens are be re-ordered automatically.
5. Press to return to the main Home screen.
Understanding Your Phone 46
Notification Bar
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show
information about processes that are running, recent
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
Clearing Notifications
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
2. Tap the
Clear
button.
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.
Clear Button
47
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and
ready access to separate device functions. These can be
quickly activated or deactivated by toggling them on or off.
The following functions can either be activated (green) or
deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Sound, Screen
rotation, Airplane mode, Power saving, Driving mode,
AllShare Cast, and Sync.
Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The
device has a USB SD card mode.
Mounting the SD Card
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection
with your computer.
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For
more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the
Memory Card” on page 8.
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available
information on it.
Understanding Your Phone 48
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to
the SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap
Unmount SD
card
.
3. Tap
OK
.
For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing
the Memory Card” on page 8.
SD card Available Memory Status
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays
under the
Total space
and
Available space
headings.
Erasing Files from the SD card
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 47.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Tap
Format SD card
.
3. At the
Format SD card
confirmation prompt, tap
Format
SD card
.
Warning!
Performing the next step erases all data stored on
the SD card.
4. Tap
Delete all
to format or press to cancel.
49
Section 3: Call Functions
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also
includes the features and functionality associated with
making or answering a call.
For more information, refer to “Sound Settings” on page
131.
Displaying Your Phone Number
Tap ➔
Settings
➔
About device
➔
Status
. Your
phone number is displayed in the
My phone number
field.
Making a Call
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
2. Tap to make the call.
Note:
When you activate the
Auto redial
option in the Voice Call
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times
when the person does not answer the call or is already
on the phone. For more information, refer to “Call
Settings” on page 60.
Making an International Call
1. From the Home screen, tap , then touch and hold
. The + character appears.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,
area code, and phone number.
•
If you make a mistake, tap
until the desired numbers have
been deleted.
3. Tap to make the call.
Manual Pause Dialing
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in
your Contacts list:
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press to display the dialer sub-menu.
3. Tap
Add 3 sec pause
to add a three second pause, and
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.
Tip:
You can create pauses longer than three seconds by
entering multiple three second pauses.
Call Functions 50
4. Select
Add wait
to add a wait. A wait will pause the
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a
key.
5. Tap to make the call.
For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers” on page 75.
Correcting an Entered Number
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when
dialing.
After entering a number using the keypad:
•
If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
•
Press and hold
to erase the entire string of numbers.
Ending a Call
Tap the key.
Dialing a Recent Number
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address
Book, the associated name also displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap the Logs tab.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the
Details
page, then
tap to make a call.
Making Emergency Calls
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn
on the phone, the
Insert SIM card to make calls
message
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install
the SIM card.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card
1. Tap
Emergency call
from the on-screen display to make
an emergency call.
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap . Complete your call. During
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker
mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
3. Tap to exit this calling mode.
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.
51
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap
.
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End
Call features.
•
After completing your emergency call, appears in the
Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode.
Note:
This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly
than a normal calling mode.
4. At the Emergency Callback screen:
•
Tap to callback 911 with a single tap.
•
Touch and slide to the right to exit this mode.
•
Touch and slide to the left return to the Home screen. This
allows you to access other applications while staying in this
mode.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your
Contacts List for speed dialing.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
to display
your Contacts List.
2. Press to display the Contacts List sub-menu.
3. Tap
Speed dial setting
.
4. The
Speed dial setting
screen displays showing the
numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for
Voicemail.
5. Tap an unused number and the
Select contact
screen
displays.
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected
contact number will display in the speed dial number
box.
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,
press to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.
8. Tap
Change order
or
Remove
.
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap ➔
Keypad
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial
number.
Call Functions 52
Making a Call from the Address Book
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are
collectively called the Address Book.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 77.
Answering a Call
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address
Book.
1. At the incoming call screen:
•
Touch and drag
in any direction to answer the call.
•
Touch and drag
in any direction to reject the call and
send it to your voicemail.
•
Touch and drag the
Reject call with message
tab upward and
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.
–
I’m driving
–
I’m at the cinema
–
I’m in class
–
I’m in a meeting
–
Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.
– or –
–
Tap
Create new message
to compose a new message.
2. Tap to end the call.
Note:
You can answer a call while using the Address Book or
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone
returns to the previously active function screen.
53
Dialing Options
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping
➔
Keypad
. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:
•
Keypad
: dials the current number entered using the on-screen
keypad.
•
Logs
: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.
•
Favorites
: displays your contacts that you have marked as
Favorites.
•
Contacts
: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a
contact to call.
After you begin to enter numbers, the
Add to Contacts
option
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.
Call Log
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the
details of the call.
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap the Logs tab.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls
are identified by the following icons:
Viewing Missed Calls from the Lock Screen
The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the
Home screen.
1. Touch the missed call icon with the number of missed
calls on it and move it in any direction.
•
Incoming Calls
:
•
Outgoing Calls
:
•
Missed Calls
:
•
Rejected Calls
:
•
Auto Rejected Calls
:
Call Functions 54
Note:
If there is a voicemail sent by the same number,
associated icons are displayed and can then be
selected.
2. The Call log is displayed. Missed calls are identified by
the
icon next to the number
.
Calling Back a Missed Call
To call back a missed call number:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.
– or –
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap
Create contact
to
add the call to your Address Book.
The Create contact screen is displayed.
– or –
If you want to replace the number for an existing
contact, tap
Update existing
.
55
4. Enter information into the various fields using the
keypad.
5. Tap
Save
to save when you are finished.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Adding a New Contact” on page 74.
Sending a Message to a Recent Call
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.
4. When you are done with your message, tap to
send.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 106.
Deleting a Call from the Call Log
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call
log.
3. Tap Delete.
4. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
.
The call is deleted from the Call log.
Adding a Call to the Reject List
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject
List.
3. Tap Add to reject list.
Add as new
Call the number Send a message
contact
Update an existing
contact
Call Functions 56
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap
OK
.
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent
to your voicemail.
Call Duration
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs.
2. Press ➔
Call duration
.
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
•Last call
: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls
received.
• All calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls made and
received.
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing
then tapping
Reset
.
Options During a Call
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you
can use during a call.
Adjusting the Call Volume
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the
Volume
keys on the left side of the phone.
Press the
Up
volume key to increase the volume level
and press the
Down
volume key to decrease the
volume level.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume
using these same keys.
In-Call Options
During an active call there are several functions available by
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.
•
Hold
:
place the current active call on hold.
•
Add call
: displays the dialer so you can call another person.
•
Keypad
: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).
•
End call
: terminates the call.
•
Speaker
: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or
through the earpiece.
–
Tap
Speaker
to route the audio through the speaker. (You can
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line
will appear under the Speaker button.
57
–
Tap
Speaker
again
to use the phone’s earpiece (see
“Using
the Speakerphone During an Active Call”
on page 59). The
green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.
•
Mute/Unmute
turn the onboard microphone either on or off.
–
Tap
Mute
during a call to mute the microphone. A green line
will appear under the Mute button.
–
Tap
Mute
again to unmute the microphone. The green line will
disappear when Mute is not activated.
•
Headset
connects to a Bluetooth headset.
–
Tap
Headset
during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A
green line will appear under the Headset button.
–
Tap
Headset
again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.
•
Press
for more options:
–
Contacts
: allows you to go to your Contact list.
–
Message
: allows you to write a message during a call.
–
S Note
: allows you to write a note using the S Note app.
–
Noise reduction on/off
: allows you to turn on the Noise
reduction feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off when
not needed to conserve battery power.
–
My call sound
: assigns a sound equalizer preset for use during
an active call. Sometimes you might need the sound to be
softer, clearer, or optimized for one ear or the other.
Placing a Call on Hold
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a
conversation. You can also make another call while you have
a call in progress if your network supports this service.
1. While on a call, tap
Hold
. This action places
the current caller on hold.
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold
.
To make a new call while you have a call in progress
1. Tap
Hold
.
2. Tap
Add call
to display the dialer.
3. Enter the new number and tap .
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.
Hold
Unhold
Hold
Call Functions 58
Switching Between Calls
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to
active and placing the other on hold.
1. Tap Swap.
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so
that you can continue conversing with that person. The
active call will appear in a green box.
2. Tap to end the currently active call.
To end a specific call
1. Tap
Swap
until the call you want to end appears in a
green box.
2. Tap to end the specific call.
3. Tap to end the remaining call.
To answer a call while you have a call in progress
1. Tap and slide to the right to answer another call.
2. Tap
Putting "Name/Number" on hold
to put the first call
on hold.
– or –
Tap
Ending call with "Name/Number"
to end the first
call.
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.
•Swap
: Places the current call on hold and then activates the
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap
Swap
again to switch back.
To end a call on hold
1. Tap to disconnect the active call.
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap
to end the call.
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Note:
The Merge option combines all of the calls you have
established with your phone (both active and on hold).
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates
the previous call.
59
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.
1. Tap and slide to the right to answer the call.
2. Tap and slide to the right to answer the next call.
3. Tap
Putting "Number" on hold
to put the first call on
hold.
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by
tapping Merge .
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap
Hold
.
To rejoin the conference call tap
Unhold
.
6. Tap to end the call.
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the
speakerphone feature.
1. Tap
Speaker
.
The
Speaker
button now appears as and the
speakerphone is activated.
2. Use the
Volume
keys (located on the left side of your
phone) to adjust the volume.
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap
Speaker
.
Important!
For more information, see “Responsible Listening”
on page 219.
Merge
Hold
Unhold
Speaker
Speaker
Speaker
Call Functions 60
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so
that the other person cannot hear you.
Example:
You wish to say something to person in the room,
but do not want the person on the phone to hear
you.
To mute your phone during a call
1. Tap Mute .
The
Mute
button now appears as and Mute is
activated.
2. Tap Mute to deactivate the Mute function and
reactivate the microphone.
Bluetooth headset
1. Tap Headset .
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When
found, connect to the headset.
The
Headset
button now appears as and the
Bluetooth headset is activated.
3. Tap Headset to deactivate the Bluetooth headset
and reactivate the phone speaker.
Searching for a Number in Address Book
1. During the active call, press then tap
Contacts
.
2. Tap the Address Book entry.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 77.
Call Waiting
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is
supported by the network, and you must first activate the
Call Waiting feature:
From the Home screen, tap ➔
➔
Call settings
➔
Additional settings
➔
Call waiting
.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call
settings
.
Mute
Mute
Mute
Headset
Headset
Headset
61
Call rejection
1. From the Call settings screen, tap
Call rejection
.
2. Tap the
OFF / ON
icon to turn Auto reject mode on
.
3. Tap
Auto reject mode
and tap one of the following
options:
• All numbers
: to reject all calls.
• Auto reject numbers
: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
4. Tap
Auto reject list
.
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
6. Tap
Unknown
, to create a checkmark and automatically
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.
Set reject messages
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Set reject messages
.
2. Tap to manually add a reject message.
– or –
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the
message if desired.
3. Tap
Save
to save the reject message.
Ringtones and keypad tones
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Ringtones and keypad tones
.
2. Tap
Device ringtone
, select a ringtone, and tap
OK
.
3. Tap
Device vibration
, select a vibration type, and tap
OK
.
4. Tap
Incoming call vibration
to create a checkmark if
you want your phone to vibrate when a call is
incoming.
5. Tap
Keytones
to create a checkmark if you want tones
to play when the keypad is pressed.
Call alert
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Call alert
.
2. Tap
Call vibrations
to enable your phone to vibrate
when the called party answers the phone.
3. Tap
Call status tones
to set the sound settings during a
call then tap
OK
.
4. Tap
Alerts on call
to turn off alarm and message
notifications during a call.
ON
Call Functions 62
Call answering/ending
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Call answering/ending
.
2. The following options are available:
• Answering key
: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming
calls by pressing the Home key.
• The power key ends calls
: This option will allow you to end a
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.
Auto screen off during calls
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.
From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call
settings
➔
Auto screen off during calls
to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
Accessory settings for call
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Accessory settings for call
.
2. The following options are available:
• Automatic answering
: configures the device to automatically
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.
• Automatic answering timer
: configures the time delay before
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.
• Outgoing call conditions
: allows you to make calls even when
the device is locked.
My call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear
during a call with and without earphones.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
My call sound
.
2. Tap
My call sound settings
.
3. Tap
Personalize call sound
and follow the detailed
on-screen instructions.
Use extra vol. for calls
This option allows you to see an extra volume button on the
screen during calls.
From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call
settings
➔
Use extra vol. for calls
to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
63
Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its
location.
From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call
settings
➔
Increase volume in pocket
to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
Call forwarding
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Call forwarding
➔
Voice call
.
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Always forward
: allows you to forward all voice calls.
• Forward when busy
allows you to forward voice calls to a
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you
are on another phone call.
• Forward when unanswered
: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.
• Forward when unreachable
: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or
when your phone is switched off.
Additional settings
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Additional settings
.
2. Tap one of the following options:
•Caller ID
: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show
number.
• Call waiting
: the network service informs you when someone
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.
• Auto redial
: automatically redials the last number if the call
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.
•Noise reduction
: allows you to suppress background noise
from your side during calls.
• Fixed Dialing Numbers
: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to
a limited set of phone numbers.
Call Functions 64
• Auto area code
: allows you to automatically prepend a specific
area code to all outbound calls. Slide the slider to the on
position.
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers
Enabling FDN
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Additional settings
➔
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Enable FDN
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap
OK
.
FDN is enabled.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap
Disable
FDN
, enter your PIN2 code and tap
OK
.
Important!
Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card
does not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.
Changing the PIN2 Code
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Additional settings
➔
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Change PIN2
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
Note:
Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be
created.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Additional settings
➔
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
FDN list
.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.
65
Voicemail service
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Voicemail Service
.
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the
default.
2. Tap
My carrier
to remove the carrier Voicemail service.
Voicemail settings
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this
menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Voicemail settings
.
2. Tap the
Voice mail number
field, backspace to erase the
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the
keypad, then tap
OK
.
3. Tap
OK
.
Ringtone
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Ringtone
.
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.
3. Select a ringtone and tap
OK
.
Vibrate
This option allows you select vibration settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
Vibrate
.
2. Tap
Always
,
Only in Silent mode
, or
Never
.
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,
to communicate by telephone.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call settings
➔
TTY mode
.
2. Tap
TTY Full
,
TTY HCO
, or
TTY VCO
. A green checkmark
will appear. Tap
TTY Off
to turn it off.
Call Functions 66
Hearing aids
This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on
your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔
Call
settings
.
2. Tap
Hearing aids
to create a checkmark and make your
device compatible with a Hearing aid.
67
Section 4: Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input
method when entering characters into your phone. This
section also describes the predictive text entry system that
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering
text.
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when
entering text.
Text Input Methods
There are three text input methods available:
•
Samsung keyboard (default)
: Samsung’s on-screen
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and
landscape orientation.
•
Google Voice typing
: allows you to enter text by speaking.
•
Swype
: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input
Methods” on page 142.
Entering Text Using the Samsung
Keyboard
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad will display.
New
Paragraph
Text Input Mode
Shift
Key Delete
Key
Space Bar
Handwriting
Entering Text 68
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.
The available Text Input modes are:
Sym
and
Abc
.
Note:
When in
Abc
mode, the
Sym
button will appear. When in
Sym
mode, the
Abc
/
ABC
/
abc
button will appear.
Using ABC Mode
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a
Landscape orientation.
2. When you tap the
Enter message
field, the following
screen displays:
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the
first letter, the shift key ( ) will change to
and following letters will be lowercase.
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will
change to in ABC mode. All following letters
will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.
Symbol/Numeric Mode
: activates the number,
symbol, and emoticon keys.
ABC Mode
: activates the default alphabet keys.
Can also be set to
Abc
or
abc
by using the shift
() key.
Sym
ABC
69
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons.
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape
orientation.
2. Tap at the bottom of the screen. The following
screen displays:
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon
characters.
4. Tap the button to access additional symbols.
5. Tap to return to Abc mode.
Predictive Text
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.
Predictive text is turned on by default.
1. To turn Predictive Text on or off, tap ➔
Settings
➔
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Samsung keyboard
.
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text
field, to .
4. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of
the words to replace the word that has already been
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more
word choices.
Sym
1/2
ABC
ON
Entering Text 70
5. Continue typing your message. Tap to send the
message or press for more options. For more
information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages”
on page 106.
Note:
You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait
orientation.
Entering Text Using Handwriting
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite
letters on your screen.
1. From the keypad, tap .
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can
print or use cursive.
3. You can write out your entire message using the
Handwriting feature or tap to switch back to
Samsung keyboard mode.
Samsung Keyboard Settings
For information on how you can configure your Samsung
keyboard settings, see “Samsung Keyboard settings” on
page 143.
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice
typing feature.
1. From the keypad, touch the top of the screen and drag
it down to display your notification panel.
2. Tap
Choose input method
.
3. Tap
Google voice typing
.
71
4. At the
Speak now
prompt, speak clearly and distinctly
into the microphone.
5. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has
timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to
start again.
The text is displayed in the message as you are
speaking.
Note:
The feature works best when you break your message
down into smaller segments.
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text
system.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard
setting.
Entering Text 72
To enable Swype:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method
.
2. Tap the
Swype
radio button. It will turn green.
The Swype keyboard is displayed.
Swype Settings
For information on how you can configure your Swype
settings, see “Swype Keypad Settings” on page 144.
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following
Swype text entry tips.
•
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such
as pp in apple).
•
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
•
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
•
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
73
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.
AT&T Address Book Activation
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized
between your phone and online address book. The changes
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your
contacts onto your new phone.
To activate the AT&T Address Book:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
Your Address Book is displayed.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your
online AT&T Address Book recently, the
AT&T Address
Book
screen is displayed. Tap
Yes
if you want to
synchronize your Address Book.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make
a call or send a message through your Address Book.
You can also manage your Address Book on the web
at
http://www.att.com/addressbook
.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Press ➔
Settings
➔
AT&T Address Book
.
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap
Yes
to
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap
Yes
or
No
.
Note:
You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM
card to your phone. For more information, refer to
“Copying Contacts to the Phone” on page 84.
Your phone is synchronized.
Contacts and Your Address Book 74
5. At the
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use
prompt,
tap
OK
.
Your Contact list is displayed.
Adding a New Contact
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your
Address Book.
Saving a Number from the Home screen
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔ .
2. At the
Save contact
prompt, tap
OK
or
Add new account
if want want to add a new account to save the contact
to.
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new
entry by choosing one of three options:
•Image
: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap
Done
.
• Take picture
: use the camera to take a new picture and assign
it to this entry, then tap
Done
.
•S Note
: retrieve a previously stored image from your S Note
app.
•Remove
: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any
previously assigned image on an existing contact.
4. Tap the
Name
field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter the full name. For more information, refer to
“Entering Text” on page 67.
– or –
Tap next to the
Name
field to display additional
name fields.
5. Tap the
Phone number
field.
The numerical keypad is displayed.
The
Mobile
button initially displays next to the
Phone number
field. If you want to add a phone number
that is not a mobile number, tap the
Mobile
button and
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.
6. Enter the phone number.
Tap to add another Phone number field or tap
to delete a field.
7. Tap the
Email address
field.
The keypad is displayed.
Mobile
75
The
Home
button initially displays next to the
Email address
field. If you want to add an Email address
that is not a Home email address, tap the
Home
button
and select from Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add
your own label).
8. Enter the Email address.
Tap to add another Email address field or tap
to delete a field.
9. Tap the
Address
field.
The keypad is displayed.
The
Home
button initially displays next to the
Address
field. If you want to add an address that is not
a Home address, tap the
Home
button and select from
Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add your own label).
10. Enter the address.
Tap to add another address field or tap to
delete a field.
11. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to
your new contact:
•Events
: tap to add a Birthday, Anniversary, Other, or
Custom.
•Groups
: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency
contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.
•Ringtone
: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will
sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose
between Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files.
• Message alert
: allows you to set a message alert tone for the
contact.
• Vibration pattern
: allows you to set the specific type of
vibration.
• Add another field
:
tap this button to add another field such as
Phonetic name, Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website,
Internet call, or Relationship.
12. Tap
Save
to save the new contact.
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers
When you call automated systems, you are often required to
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses
Home
Home
Contacts and Your Address Book 76
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you
enter a number or press a key.
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
, and then tap
the name or number to open the Contact.
2. Tap to edit.
3. Tap the phone number field.
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait
needs to be added.
5. Tap .
6. Tap
Pause
to add a two-second pause or tap
Wait
to
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).
7. Tap
Save
to save your changes, or tap
Cancel
to
discard.
Editing an Existing Contact
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and
change or delete the information, or you can add additional
fields to the contact’s list of information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.
3. Tap
Edit
.
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete
information.
5. Tap
Save
to save the edited information.
Using Contacts
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM
card location number or by using the Search field to locate
the entry.
From the Address book, you can also send messages.
Sym
77
Finding an Address Book Entry
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a
single entity, called the Address Book.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how
they are stored may differ.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to
the contacts beginning with that letter.
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the
message icon to send a message.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 106.
Tip:
From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.
Contacts and Your Address Book 78
Joining Contacts
Joining Contact Information
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge
these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her
entries and view the information in one record.
The next time you synchronize your phone with your
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your
contacts list.
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 79.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to
another entry).
Note
: typically this is the same contact
with a different name or account information.
3. Press ➔
Join contact
.
The contact list is displayed.
Note:
Only contacts stored on your phone can be joined.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to
join). The second contact is now joined with the first
and the account information is merged into one screen.
Note:
The information is still maintained in both entries, but
displays in one record for easier viewing when you join
the contacts.
5. Tap the
Connection
bar to view the contact information
you joined. The contacts and information displays with
an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type
of account information is contained in the entry.
79
Unjoining a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unlink an entry).
Note
: typically this is the same
contact with a different name or account information.
3. Tap the
Connection
bar.
4. Tap the minus sign next to entry in which you
want to unjoin. The contact is now separated and no
longer displays in the merged record screen.
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use messaging type applications, the application
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be
looking for the “default” number or entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Tap a Contact name.
3. Press ➔
Mark as default
. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.
The radio button next to the default contact will be
green.
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next
to another entry that you want to be the default. The
radio button will turn green, then tap
Done
.
Synchronizing Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Press then tap
Accounts
.
3. Tap the
Auto sync app data
checkbox to create a
checkmark and activate the feature.
Contacts and Your Address Book 80
4. Tap
OK
to synchronize all accounts.
The accounts are synchronized.
Address Book Options
You can access Address Book options while at the main
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific
entry.
Options in Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
then press
.
2. The following options are displayed:
• Delete:
allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• SIM Management
: allows you to copy contacts from your
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.
•Import/Export
: allows you to move contacts to or from your
memory card or USB storage. You can also send a namecard
via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• Accounts
: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,
ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol),
and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account
and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• Speed dial setting
: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For
more information, refer to
“Making a Call Using Speed
Dial”
on page 51.
• Send email
: allows you to send an email using your Google
account.
• Send message
: allows you to send a text or picture message.
• Contacts to display
: You can choose to display all of your
contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized
list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.
•Settings
: allows you to choose set the following options:
–
Only contacts with phones
: allows you to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
–
List by
: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.
–
Display contacts by
: allows you to sort by First name or Last
name first.
81
–
Service numbers
: allows you to
display or edit your service
numbers.
–
Contact sharing settings
: allows you to send all or individual
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.
–
AT&T Address Book
: allows you to access the AT&T Address
Book so you can sync your contacts.
Options at Selected Contact Screen
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press
.
3. The following options are displayed:
•History
: allows you to view the phone and message history for
the contact.
•Edit
: allows you to edit the contact’s information.
•Delete
: allows you to delete the contact from your Address
Book.
•Join contact
: allows you to join contacts with other contacts
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).
• Separate contact
: allows you to separate contacts that have
been joined.
• Mark as default
: when you have multiple contacts linked
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,
refer to
“Marking a Contact as Default”
on page 79.
• Assign speed dial
: allows you to assign this contact to your
speed dial list. For more information, refer to
“Making a Call
Using Speed Dial”
on page 51.
• Share namecard via
: allows you to send the contact’s
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Add to/Remove from reject list
: allows you to add or remove
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.
• Print contact info
: allows you to print the contact’s namecard
to a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.
• Add shortcut to Home
: allows you to place a shortcut for this
contact on your Home screen.
Contacts and Your Address Book 82
Groups
Adding a Contact to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a
group.
3. Tap
Add to group
.
4. Tap a group entry.
5. Tap
Done
.
The contact is added to the group.
Removing a Contact From a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press ➔
Remove member
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their
name.
5. Tap
Done
.
The contacts are now removed from the group.
Creating a New Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔
Groups
➔ ➔
Create
.
2. Tap the
Group name
field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new group name. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 67.
3. Tap
Group ringtone
to choose an audio file for
assignment to this new group. Choose from
Default
,
Ringtones
, or
Go to My files
.
4. Tap
Vibration pattern
to choose an audio file for
assignment to this new group.
5. Tap
Add member
to add contacts to the new group.
6. Tap each contact you want to add to create a
checkmark. You can also tap
Select all
.
7. Tap
Done
.
8. Tap
Save
to save the new Group category.
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as
part of the selected group.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
Groups
Groups
Groups
83
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press ➔
Edit
.
4. Make modifications to the
Group name
,
Group ringtone
,
or
Vibration pattern
fields.
5. Tap
Add member
to add more contacts to this group.
6. Tap
Done
.
7. Tap
Save
to save the edited Group category.
Address Book Favorites
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can add them to your Favorites list.
To view your Favorites list:
From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔
Favorites
.
Adding Favorites to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to add to your favorites list.
3. Tap
Add to Favorites
on the displayed list.
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the
Address Book.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in
your Favorites list will have a gold star.
3. Tap
Remove from favorites
on the displayed list.
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact
in the Address Book.
Managing Address Book Contacts
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card
Note:
When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,
only the name, phone number, and email address are
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to
another phone that does not support additional fields on
the SIM card, this additional information may not be
available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔ ➔
SIM Management
.
Favo rites
Contacts and Your Address Book 84
2. Tap
Copy Contacts to SIM
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap
Select all
to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap
Done
to copy.
5. At the
Copy to SIM
display, tap
OK
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
Copying Contacts to the Phone
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔ ➔
SIM Management
.
2. Tap
Copy Contacts from SIM
.
3. At the
Create contact under account
prompt, tap on
Phone
or an account name that you would like to copy
the contact to.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts
stored on your SIM card.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to
your phone or tap
Select all
to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
5. Tap
Done
to copy.
The selected numbers are copied.
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔ ➔
SIM Management
.
2. Tap
Delete Contacts from SIM
.
The phone then displays a list of your current SIM
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM
card.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap
Select all
to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap
Delete
.
5. At the
Delete Contacts from SIM
prompt, tap
OK
.
85
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s
memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to delete.
3. Tap
Delete
on the displayed list.
4. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
to delete the contact or
Cancel
to exit.
Using the Service Dialing Numbers
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and
directory inquiries.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔ ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap
Service numbers
.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).
4. Tap a number and the call is made.
Note:
This menu is available only when your SIM card
supports Service Dialing Numbers.
Multimedia 86
Section 6: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of
your phone, including AT&T Locker, Media Hub, Music Hub,
Music Player, Google Play Music, Video Player, Play Movies &
TV, Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.
AT&T Locker
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient
place; the AT&T cloud.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Locker
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
The Play Store is displayed.
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of
Service will be displayed. Tap
Accept
to continue or
Decline
to exit.
4. Tap
Update
.
5. Tap
Accept & download
.
AT&T Locker will be downloaded to your device.
6. At the AT&T Locker homescreen, tap
Sign Me Up!
to
create an account or tap
Sign In
if you already have an
account.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.
Media Hub
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your
fingertips, entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has
never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere.
Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known
for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like
you've never experienced it before.
Note:
Media Hub usage is based on service availability.
Using Media Hub
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
➔
Unknown sources
to create a checkmark and allow
the Samsung app to run.
87
2. At the warning prompt, tap
OK
.
3. Tap
Home
➔ ➔
Media Hub
.
4. Read the
Terms and Conditions
screen and tap the
I
agree to the Terms and Conditions
checkbox.
5. Tap
Accept
to continue or
Decline
to exit.
The Media Hub screen displays.
6. At the Media Hub screen,
What’s New
is displayed with
recently added media that you can rent or purchase.
7. The following tabs are displayed at the top of the
screen:
•Home
: displays the Media Hub main screen.
•Movies
: displays movies that are available for rent or purchase.
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie
category. The movies of that type will be displayed below.
•TV Shows
: displays TV shows that are available for purchase.
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category.
The TV shows of that type will be displayed below.
•My Media
: allows you to view all of the media that you have
purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it.
8. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item
you would like to purchase or rent.
9. At the Details screen, follow the on-screen instructions
to create a Samsung account and make a purchase.
10. The media will be stored in the My Media folder.
Media Hub Notices
•
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Media Hub.
•
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to
the same account.
•
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more
than once every 90 days.
•
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download
availability and studio permissions.
•
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you
have acquired through the Service.
•
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download
Media Content.
•
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account.
Multimedia 88
•
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.
•
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
•
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
•
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24
consecutive hours of start of playback.
•
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
•
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
•
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.
Music Hub
The Music Hub app lets you upload your music collection to
the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive
catalog, and listen to personal radio.
Note:
You must sign up for an account before accessing some
of the Music Hub options.
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Hub
.
3. Read the introduction material and tap
Continue
to
continue. Tap
Music Hub Video
to watch a helpful video
about Music Hub.
The Music Hub Home screen displays.
4. Tap one of the following options:
•Featured
: This is the Music Hub home screen. Displays top
albums, featured albums, top tracks, new releases, and more.
Tap an item to display more information and prices.
•Genres
: Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre, such
as pop, rock, jazz, comedy, and blues.
89
• Playlists
: Displays downloaded playlists and your library of
songs and albums. Tap
New
to create a new playlist.
•My page
: Displays the following options:
–
Basket
: Displays songs that you have selected to buy. Tap
Buy
to start the purchase process. Tap
Menu
➔
Delete
all to clear
your basket or tap
Remove
to delete songs from your basket.
–
Purchase List
: Displays a list of your purchases.
–
Payment information
: Allows you to set up your payment
method. Tap
Add card
to enter your payment information.
–
Help
: Display help information for Music Hub.
Note:
You have to be signed in to use some options.
To sign in, tap
Sign in
and use the keyboard to enter your
Email address
and
Music Hub Password
.
Tap
Create account
to set up a new account.
5. Tap (
Search
) and use the keyboard to enter a key
word or phrase to search for tracks, albums, or artists.
Tap on the keyboard to search Music Hub. Select
an item to play a sample, add an item to your basket,
or add an item to your album.
Making a Purchase
You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks.
You can also build your own album from various tracks.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Hub
.
2. Select an album or a track.
3. Tap (
Cart
) next to an album to add the album to
your basket or next to each track that you want to add
to your basket.
4. Tap (
Add
) next to the album to add it to your
album.
– or –
5. Tap (
Add
) next to each track that you want to add
to your album.
6. Tap
New
to create a new album.
Music Player
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.
The Music Player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger
than 300 KB are displayed).
Multimedia 90
Playing Music
1. Tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All,
Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to
view the available music files.
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to
begin playback.
4. The following Music Player controls are available:
Music Player Options
To access additional options, follow these steps:
1. While in the Music Player, press .
2. The follow options are available:
• Add to quick list
: adds the current music file to the Quick list.
• Via Bluetooth
: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth
headset.
•Share via
: allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth,
Email, Gmail, Group Cast, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
•Add to playlist:
allows you to add the current music file to a
selected playlist.
Pause the song.
Start the song after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go
to next song.
Volume control.
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song.
Repeat all: replays the current list when the list
ends.
Play All: plays the current song list once.
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly
shuffled for playback.
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not
shuffled.
Provides access to the Music square.
Lists the current playlist songs.
Displays the current song in the player window.
Provides access to the SoundAlive feature.
91
•Details
: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title,
Biography, and other information.
•Set as:
allows you to set a music file to Phone ringtone, Caller
ringtone, or Alarm tone.
• Settings
: allows you to change your Music Player settings. For
more information, refer to
“Music Player Settings”
on
page 91.
•End
: allows you to end the Music Player app.
Music Player Settings
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set
preferences for the Music Player such as whether you want
the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how
the music menu displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Press ➔
Settings
.
3. Select one of the following settings:
•SoundAlive
: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.
• Play speed
: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and
2.0X using the slider.
• Music menu
: this menu allows you to select which categories
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you
want to display in the Music menu.
•Lyrics
: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if
available.
• Music auto off
: when activated, music will automatically turn
off after a set interval.
Using Playlists
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music
Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music
application (such as Windows Media Player) and then
downloaded to the handset.
Creating a Playlist
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap the
Playlists
tab.
3. Press ➔
Create playlist
.
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap
OK
.
Multimedia 92
Adding Music to a Playlist
To add files to the playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap the
Playlists
tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
4. Tap
Add music
.
5. Tap a music file, or tap
Select all
to add all the music
tracks to this playlist then tap
Done
.
Removing Music from a Playlist
To remove music files from a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap the
Playlists
tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4. Press ➔
Remove
.
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to
remove from this playlist, or tap
Select all
to remove all
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap
Remove
.
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also rename the playlist.
To edit a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap
Playlists
.
3. Press ➔
Edit title
.
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap
OK
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see
“Google Play Music” on page 92.
Google Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Music
.
2. At the Welcome screen, tap
Next
.
3. At the
Select an account
screen, tap an account that
you would like to link to Google Play Music or tap
Add
Account
.
4. At the
Get free music
screen, tap
Get free songs
or
Skip
.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions for getting your free
music.
93
All music on your device and external SD card is
displayed including Music folders that may contain
multiple songs.
6. Tap a song to start playback.
7. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of
the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs:
Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, Playlists, and Genres.
8. Tap for the following options:
• Shuffle all
: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled
order.
• Settings
: allows you to view Open source licenses and the
music version for the Play Music application.
•Help
: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support
website.
Video Player
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
microSD card.
1. Tap ➔
Video Player
.
2. All videos that you have on your phone and memory
card will be displayed. Tap the video that you want to
play.
3. The video will begin to play.
4. The following video controls are available:
Pause the video.
Start the video after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to
go to previous video.
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.
Tap to go to next video.
Volume control.
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. T
he video will
be played in a small window so you can use
your phone for other purposes while watching
the video. Double-tap screen to return to
previous size.
Original size view. T
he video will be played in
its original size.
Full-screen in ratio view. T
he video is
enlarged as much as possible without
becoming distorted.
Multimedia 94
Note:
The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,
see “Media Hub” on page 86.
Play Movies & TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Movies & TV
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies and TV shows.
4. Tap the
MOVIES
tab to view movies you can rent.
5. Tap the
TV SHOWS
tab to view shows you can rent.
6. Tap the
PERSONAL VIDEOS
tab to view movies you have
on your phone or memory card.
7. Press for additional options.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message.
1. Tap ➔
Gallery
.
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will
be displayed with folder name and number of files.
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be
displayed.
Note:
If your device displays that the memory is full when you
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using
My files
or other file management applications and try again. For
more information, refer to “My Files” on page 192.
Full-screen view. T
he entire screen is used,
which may cause some minor distortion.
95
Viewing Pictures
1. From the main gallery, tap
Slideshow
to see a
slideshow of all of your pictures.
2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.
Note:
If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
3. The following options are available at the top of the
screen:
• Camera
: activates the camera.
•Share via
: allows you to share the picture via AT&T
Locker, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,
Messaging, Picasa, S Note or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the picture.
4. Press for additional options.
Viewing Videos
Note:
If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap to play the video.
3. Press for additional options.
For video player controls, see “Video Player” on
page 93.
Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam
large files directly to another compatible device that is in
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and
videos from your gallery, music files from your music player,
and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
NFC
.
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the
NFC
slider to the right to turn it on .
3. Tap
S Beam
and make sure the feature is turned on.
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the
S Beam
slider to the right to turn it on .
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap ➔
Gallery
.
ON
ON
Multimedia 96
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the
preview window.
Important!
Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying
the Lock screen. They must both be active and
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device
be on the Home screen.
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin (1).
Note:
If the
Touch to beam
screen does not appear on the
source device:
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
8. From the
Touch to beam
screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer (2).
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap ➔
Gallery
.
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark
on it and all desired images.
Touch to beam
Place devices back to back
Tap the source image
97
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
5. From the
Touch to beam
screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
When prompted, separate the two devices.
Camera
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-
in camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces
photos in JPEG format.
Important!
Do not take photos of people without their
permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then
pressing the camera key.
Note:
When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.
1. From the main Home screen, tap ➔
Camera
to activate the camera mode.
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
3. Before you take a picture, use the
Up
and
Down
Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
– or –
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to
zoom in.
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap
on-screen icons to access various camera options and
settings.
Multimedia 98
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the
area you touch.
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.
(The picture is automatically stored within your
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,
all pictures are stored on the Phone.) For more
information, refer to “Camera Options” on page 98.
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen
inwards to zoom out.
You can magnify the picture up to x4.
8. Press to return to the viewfinder.
Camera Options
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the
screen.
Display Image
Settings
Storage Location
Camera
Key
Image
Viewer
Mode
Front
Flash
Facing
Camera
Charger on
Mode
Shooting
Effects
Camera / Camcorder Mode
: allows you to take a photo
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
Self-portrait
: allows you to activate the front facing
camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video
chat.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or
Auto flash.
Shooting mode
: allows you to set the shooting mode to
one of the following:
•
Single shot
: takes a single photo and view it before
returning to the shooting mode.
A
99
•
Best photo
: takes 8 photographs in quick
succession and allows you to select and save the
best.
•
Best Face
: takes 5 photographs in quick
succession and selects the best photograph based
on open eyes, smiles, sudden movement, etc.
•
Face detection
: double tap on a face to zoom in or
out.
•
Panorama
: takes a landscape photo by taking an
initial photo and then adding additional images to
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where
the second part of the panoramic picture should
fall within.
•
Share shot
: uses Wi-Fi Direct to share your
pictures quickly with your friends.
•
HDR
: takes pictures in HDR (High Dynamic Range)
mode to increase image detail.
•
Buddy photo share
: uses face recognition from
pictures in your contacts to send your friends or
family pictures of themselves.
•
Beauty
: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial
features.
•
Smile shot
: the camera focuses on the face of your
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s
smile, it takes the picture.
•
Low light
: allows you to take better pictures when
the light is low.
Effects
: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the photo. Options include: No effect,
Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.
Settings:
Edit shortcuts
: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
Burst shot
: takes 8 photographs in quick succession
and allows you to select and save the best.
Self-portrait
: allows you to set the front camera so you
can take pictures of yourself.
Multimedia 100
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or
Auto flash.
Shooting mode
: allows you to set the shooting mode.
Effects
: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the photo. Options include: No effect,
Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.
Scene mode
: allows you to set the Scene to help take the
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,
Landscape, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,
Sunset, Dawn, Autumn Color, Text, and Candlelight.
Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the
bottom of the display screen.
Exposure value
: allows you to adjust the brightness
level by moving the slider.
Focus mode
: allows you to set this option to Auto focus
or Macro. Use Macro mode to take close-up pictures.
Timer
: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5
sec, and 10 sec.
Resolution
: allows you to set the image size to either:
8M (3264x2448), W6M (3264x1836),
3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1152),
W0.9M (1280x720), or 0.3M (640x480).
White balance
: allows you to set this option to one of the
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
ISO
: ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on
your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400,
or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera
less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera
automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
Metering
: allows you to set how the camera measures
or meters the light source: Matrix, Center-weighted, or
Spot.
101
Outdoor visibility
: allows you to maximize your photos
taken while outdoors.
Auto contrast
: provides a clear image even under
backlight circumstances where intensity of
illumination can vary excessively.
Guidelines
: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Auto share shot
: allows you to easily connect to the
devices you want to share pictures with and then bring
the devices back together (back to back) to connect
them.
Anti-Shake
: reduces image blur due to the movement
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.
GPS tag
: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap ➔
Settings
➔
Location services
and tap
Use GPS satellites
to create a checkmark.
Shutter sound
: allows you to set the Shutter sound to On
or Off.
Contextual filename
: allows you to have your location
added as part of the filename. You must first activate
GPS tag described above.
Take photos using voice
: allows you to take photos
using your voice. You can use words such as Capture,
Shoot, Smile, and Cheese.
Save as flipped
: when set to On, this option allows you
to take and save a mirror-image photo.
Image quality
: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
Storage
: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or
Memory card (if inserted).
Reset
: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder
settings to the default values.
Multimedia 102
Viewing your Pictures
After you take a photo, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For
more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 94.
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send
videos.
Note:
The camera may not be able to properly record videos to
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.
Shooting Video
Tip:
When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your
subject with sufficient light by having the light source
behind you.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Camera
to
activate the camera mode.
2. Touch and drag the Camera mode button down to
Camcorder Mode.
3. Tap the Recording mode that you prefer. Select
between Normal, Limit for MMS, Slow motion, or Fast
motion.
4. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the
subject.
5. Before you take a video, use the
Up
and
Down
Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up to
x4 (400 percent).
– or –
Image viewer
: allows you to access the Image viewer
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.
Image viewer options are described in the following
section. The last picture you took, will be displayed as
a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.
103
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to
zoom in.
6. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red
light will blink while recording.
7. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area
you touch.
8. Tap to turn on auto focus. This will automatically
focus on the middle of the screen.
9. To capture an image from the video while recording,
tap . This feature is not available when the anti-
shake feature is activated.
10. Tap the Video key ( ) again to stop the recording and
save the video file to your Camera folder.
11. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,
then tap to play your video for review.
12. Press to return to the viewer.
Camcorder Options
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the
screen.
Camera / Camcorder Mode
: allows you to take a photo
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
Live Shooting
: takes a photo during a video recording
session in Camcorder mode. You can view the photo in
your image viewer or Gallery.
Self portrait
: allows you to activate the front facing
camera so you can take videos of yourself or video chat.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually
while you are taking a video.
Recording mode
: allows you to set the recording mode
to: Normal, Limit for MMS, Slow motion, and Fast
motion.
Multimedia 104
Effects
: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the video. Options include: No effect,
Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.
Settings:
Edit shortcuts
: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
Self-recording
: allows you to set the front camera so
you can take videos of yourself or video chat.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually
while you are taking a video.
Recording mode
: allows you to set the recording mode
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on
the destination location; Limit for MMS, which is limited
by MMS size restrictions; Slow motion, which records
in slow motion; and Fast motion, which records in fast
motion.
Effects
: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the video. Options include: No effect,
Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.
Exposure value
: allows you to adjust the brightness
level by moving the slider.
Timer
: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a video. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec,
and 10 sec.
Resolution
: allows you to set the image size to either:
1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, or
320x240.
105
Viewing your Videos
After you take a video, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and
the Video Player. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 94. Also, see“Video Player” on page 93.
White balance
: allows you to set this option to one of the
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
Outdoor visibility
: allows you to maximize your photos
taken while outdoors.
Guidelines
: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Anti-Shake
: reduces image blur due to the movement
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.
GPS tag
: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap ➔
Settings
➔
Location services
and tap
Use GPS satellites
to create a checkmark.
Contextual filename
: allows you to have your location
added as part of the filename. You must first activate
GPS tag described above.
Save as flipped
: when set to On, this option allows you
to take and save a mirror-image video when using self-
recording mode.
Video quality
: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
Storage
: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or
Memory card (if inserted).
Reset
: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder
settings to the default values.
Image viewer
: allows you to access the Image viewer
and the various viewing options for a selected video.
Image viewer options are described in the following
section. The last video you took, will be displayed as a
thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.
Messaging 106
Section 7: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive different
types of messages. It also includes the features and
functionality associated with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
•
Text Messages
•
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
•
Email and Gmail Messages
•
AT&T Messages
•
Google Talk
•
Google+ and Messenger Messages
•
ChatON
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s multimedia message service.
Important!
When creating a message, adding an image, a
sound file, or a video clip to a text message
changes the message from a text message to a
multimedia message.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For
more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 23.
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
➔
Compose
.
107
Note:
The main Home screen initially contains the
Messaging
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap
Apps
➔
Messaging
.
2. Tap on the
Enter recipient
field to manually enter a
recipient or tap to select a recipient from your
Contacts.
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the
contact to place a checkmark then tap
Done
.
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.
Note:
For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted
entries.
Note:
Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.
4. Tap the
Enter message
field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer
to “Entering Text” on page 67.
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.
6. Review your message and tap
Send
.
Note:
If you exit a message before you send it, it will be
automatically saved as a draft.
Message Options
Options before composing a message
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Before composing a message, press to reveal
additional messaging options:
•Search
: allows you to search through all of your messages for
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the
Messaging Search window and tap .
• Delete threads
: allows you to delete any message thread.
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will
appear next to the message. Tap
Delete
.
•Draft messages
: displays the draft messages folder and its
contents.
Messaging 108
• Scheduled messages
: displays the scheduled messages
folder and its contents.
• Locked messages
: displays the locked messages folder and
its contents.
• Spam messages
: displays the spam messages folder and its
contents.
•Settings
: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to
“Messaging Settings”
on page 111.
Options while composing a message
1. While composing a message, press to reveal
additional messaging options.
•Call
: allows you to call the contact. This option only appears if
you have entered a phone number for the recipient.
•Insert smiley
: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy
face to your message.
•Add text
: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your
message.
For more information, refer to “Adding
Additional Text”
on page 109.
•Add to Contacts
: allows you to add the recipient to your
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not
already in your Contacts list.
•View contact
: allows you to see information on the recipient.
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.
• Add slide
: allows you to add a new page to a message.
• Add recipients
: allows you to add additional recipients.
• Scheduled Message
: allows you to assign the current
message for scheduled delivery at a designated time.
• Delete message
: allows you to delete the message.
• Register number as spam
: allows you to register the number
as spam.
• Remove from spam number list
: allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
•Discard
: allows you to delete the message.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap and select
one of the following options:
•
Images
: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures
list to add it to your message.
109
•
Take picture
: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a
photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by
tapping
Save
.
•
Video
: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,
then add it to your message
.
•
Capture video
: allows you to temporarily exit the message,
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it
to your message by tapping
Save
.
•
Audio
: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping
Done
.
•
Record audio
: allows you to temporarily exit the message and
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then
automatically attached to the message.
•
S Note
: allows you to add an S Note that you have created.
•
Calendar
: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select
the desired event and tap
Done
.
•
Location
: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing
your location.
•
Contacts
: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
then add it to your message by tapping
Done
.
Adding Additional Text
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press ➔
Add text
.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
•S Note
: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note.
•Calendar
: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a
calendar event to your message.
•Location
: allows you to add an address and the link to the
location on Google Maps.
•Contacts
: allows you to add the name and phone number of
any of your contacts to your message.
• Text templates
: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and
sentences.
The information is added to your message.
Viewing New Received Messages
1. When you receive a new message, the new message
icon will appear at the top of your screen.
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For
more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page
46.
Messaging 110
– or –
From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
then
tap the new message to view it.
The selected message appears in the display.
3. To play a multimedia message, tap .
•
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages
have been added), touch the screen and in a single
motion, scroll up or down the page.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed
in the order in which they were received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
To open a threaded message follow these steps:
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
Tap the message thread you want to view.
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the
following options:
•View contact
: displays the contact’s information. This option
only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.
•Add to Contacts
: displays the Contacts information screen.
This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts
list.
• Delete thread
: displays a confirmation dialog box that when
pressed, deletes the entire thread.
• Register number as spam
: allows you to register the number
as spam.
• Remove from spam number list
: allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
Deleting Messages
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap
Delete thread
.
3. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to
cancel.
111
Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Press ➔
Delete threads
.
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark
will appear beside each message you select.
4. Tap
Delete
.
5. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to
cancel.
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the
Message Search feature.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Tap ➔
Search
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to
search for, then tap .
4. All messages that contain the search string you
entered are displayed.
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
➔
➔
Settings
.
2. The following Messaging settings are available:
Display:
• Bubble style
: allows you to choose from several bubble styles
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that
surround each message.
• Background style
: allows you to choose from several
background styles for your messages.
•Split view
: when in Landscape mode, allows you to view both
the message list and the contents of the currently selected
message.
• Use the volume key
: allows you to change the text size by
using the up or down volume keys.
General settings:
• Delete old messages
: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than having them overwritten.
Messaging 112
• Text message limit
: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages can be in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit
: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.
• Text templates
: allows you to edit or add new text templates to
use in your messaging.
Text message (SMS) settings:
• Manage SIM card messages
: allows you to manage the
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.
• Message center
: allows you to enter the number of your
Message center where your messages reside while the system
is attempting to deliver them.
• Input mode
: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or
Automatic.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings:
•Auto-retrieve
: allows the message system to retrieve
messages automatically.
•Creation mode
: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
–
Restricted
: you can only create and submit messages with
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
–
Warning
: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the
Core MM Content Domain.
–
Free
: you may add any content to the message.
• MMS alert
: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode
becomes active.
Push message settings:
• Push messages
: allows you to receive push messages from
the network.
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:
•CB activation
: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)
messages.
• Channel configuration
: allows you to set up the channel that
you will receive CB messages on.
Notifications settings:
• Notifications
: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
113
• Select ringtone
: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message notifications.
•Vibrate
: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated
with message alerts.
• Message alert repetition
: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every
10 minutes.
• Preview message
: when enabled, allows you to view a
preview of new message text on the Status bar.
Signature settings:
• Add signature
: when enabled, this feature allows you to create
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
• Signature text
: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
Spam message settings:
• Spam settings
: when enabled, allows you to configure
available spam settings such as:
• Register number as spam
: allows you to manually enter and
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.
• Register phrase as spam
: allows you to assign a specific text
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
• Block unknown senders
: when active, automatically blocks
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
Using Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email.
Creating an Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Email
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the
Email
address
field.
3. Enter your password in the
Password
field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap
Show password
to create a checkmark.
5. Tap
Next
.
6. At the
Account options
screen, tap any of the options
you would like.
7. Tap
Next
.
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).
9. Tap
Done
.
Messaging 114
Creating a Corporate Email Account
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Email
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the
Email
address
field.
3. Enter your password in the
Password
field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap
Show password
to create a checkmark.
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email
account by default, tap checkbox to create a
checkmark.
6. Tap
Manual setup
.
7. Tap the
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
field.
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,
User name and Password, then tap
Next
.
9. At the
Activation
prompt, tap
OK
.
The
Account options
screen is displayed.
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,
then tap
Next
.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and
tap
Done
.
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.
12. Press ➔
Settings
to change the account settings.
Creating Additional Email Accounts
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first
account, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Email
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Press ➔
Settings
.
3. Tap to add another email account.
4. Enter the information required to set up another
account. For more information, refer to “Creating an
Email Account” on page 113.
115
Switching Between Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Email
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Tap the Inbox button at the top of your screen that
displays the optional name you assigned to your active
email account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc.
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.
3. Tap the Email account you would like to switch to. You
can also select
Combined view
which will display email
messages from all accounts.
4. The new Email account is displayed.
Using Gmail
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
Signing into Your Gmail
Note:
You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to
access Gmail.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Gmail
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Creating a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap at the bottom of the
screen to create a new message.
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the
To
field.
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a
comma.
3. Tap and select
Add Cc/Bcc
to add a carbon or blind
copy.
4. Enter the subject of this message in the
Subject
field.
5. Tap the
Compose email
field and begin composing your
message.
Messaging 116
6. Tap to send.
Viewing a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the
screen after a message has been selected:
•Archive
: archives the selected message.
• Delete
: deletes the message.
•Labels
: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is
similar to putting it in a folder.
• Mark Unread
: after reading a message, marks as unread.
• Newer
: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.
•Older
: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.
3. Press to select one of the following additional
options:
• Mark important/not important
: allows you to set the
importance of a message.
•Mute
: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.
•Report spam
: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap
the UNDO option if you change your mind.
•Settings
: displays Email settings that you can modify.
•Help
: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the
web for help.
• Send feedback
: allows you to send feedback or report a
problem.
Other Gmail Options
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the
screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize
your email with the Gmail account.
2. Tap at the bottom of the screen to set up and
manage Labels for your Gmail messages.
3. Tap at the bottom of the screen to search through
your Gmail messages.
Google Talk
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your
Gmail accounts.
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
117
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Talk
.
3. Begin using Google Talk.
4. Press ➔
Help
for more information on using
Google Talk.
Note:
The Network confirms your login and processes. This
could take up to 5 minutes to complete.
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Google+
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap
Add account
to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit
www.google.com/mobile/+/
for more information.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Messenger
.
– or –
From the Google+ application, select
Messenger
.
3. Tap
Learn more
for more detailed information.
4. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap
Add account
to create another account.
5. At the
Messenger
screen, tap to start a new
message.
6. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or
circle.
Messaging 118
7. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap
.
Messages App
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail
messages together into a single conversation thread and is
accessible by phone or computer.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Messages
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
Note:
The first time you use the Messages app, you will need
to download the updated application from the Play
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap
Update
.
For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page
197.
3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap
Continue
or tap
Learn More
to receive more
information.
4. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set
up a few things. Tap
Record Greeting
to record a
personal greeting, or tap
Skip
if you want to do it later.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages
app.
ChatON
Provides a global mobile communication service where you
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location
information.
Important!
The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as AllShare Play, ChatON, and
Media Hub.
For more information, visit:
https://web.samsungchaton.com
.
Registering with the Service
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account.
119
Note:
There should be no (
Samsung account
icon) in the
Notifications area of the screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
ChatON
.
2. Read the on-screen notification about data charges
and tap
OK
.
3. Select
Terms and conditions
and
Privacy policy
and read
the on-screen information. Tap
Accept
to continue.
4. Select a country code, enter your current phone
number to register with the service, and tap
Done
.
5. Choose to receive the verification code via either
SMS
(text message) or
Voice
to your device.
Note:
If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this
information is sent directly to your device. Once
received, the
Verification
field is automatically filled in.
6. Enter your real name and tap
OK
.
Adding Your First Chat On Buddy
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
ChatON
.
2. Tap
Add buddy
and choose a search method.
• Address
: to search by Country code and phone number.
• Search by Samsung Account ID
: to search by using
a known samsung account ID.
3. Enter the information and tap . Once the recipient
is matched, their entry appears in the
Results
area.
4. Tap (
Add buddy
) and confirm your new buddy
appears in the Buddies tab.
Note:
For more information, press and tap
General
➔
Help
.
Using ChatON for Chatting
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
ChatON
.
2. Tap the Buddies tab and select a buddy to initiate your
chat.
3. Enter your message using the on-screen text entry
method.
4. Tap to send the message.
Send
Messaging 120
To reply to a ChatON message:
1. While the chat session is active, tap the
Enter message
field and then type your reply message.
2. Compose your reply.
Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy’s messages
are white.
3. Tap to deliver your reply.
Deleting a single message bubble
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
ChatON
.
2. Launch a chat session to reveal the message string.
3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select
Delete
.
Buddy’s Bubble
My Bubble
Text Message
Thread
Send
121
Section 8: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the settings used for customizing your
device.
Accessing Settings
From any Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
– or –
From any Home screen, press ➔
Settings
.
The Settings screen displays.
Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on
how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 164.
Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .
3. Tap
Scan
to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more
information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 164.
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage
wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Tap
Advanced
.
The following options are available:
• Network notification
: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep
: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Check for Internet service
: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is
available when connected to an AP (Access Point).
• Auto connect
: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
•MAC address
: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
•IP address
: view your device’s IP address.
ON
Changing Your Settings 122
Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices
with which to pair.
Activating Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON .
The Bluetooth icon is displayed.
Additional Bluetooth Settings
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Bluetooth
.
2. Tap
Scan
to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more
information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth Devices” on
page 169.
3. Press and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:
• Rename device
: Your device’s default name displays on
screen. Tap to change the device name. Available when
Bluetooth is turned On.
• Visible time-out
: Use this setting to control when to
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.
• Received files
: Show the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
4. Tap the checkbox next to
SAMSUNG-SGH-I317
if you do
not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices.
Data Usage
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Data
usage
.
2. Tap
Mobile data
to create a checkmark and turn Mobile
data usage on.
3. Tap
Set mobile data limit
to create a checkmark and
allow a data limit to be set.
4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you
desire.
ON
123
5. Tap the
Data usage cycle
drop-down menu and select a
date.
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of
how much data was used per application.
Note:
Data is measured by your device. Your service provider
may account for data usage differently.
6. Press to display additional options. Tap to activate.
• Data roaming
: enables Data roaming on your device.
• Restrict background data
: restricts some apps and services
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.
• Auto-sync data
: allows your accounts to automatically sync
•Show Wi-Fi usage
: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi
usage.
• Mobile hotspots
: displays available mobile hotspots.
More Settings
This option displays additional Connectivity information.
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
.
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,
Tethering and portable hotspots, VPN, NFC, S Beam,
Nearby devices, AllShare Cast, and Kies via Wi-Fi.
Airplane mode
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving
calls or data is prohibited.
Important!
When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online
information or applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap
More settings
located under the Connectivity
heading.
3. Tap
Airplane mode
. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Airplane mode is active.
4. At the
Airplane mode
prompt, tap
OK
.
The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of
your screen.
Changing Your Settings 124
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
your location or search for places of interest, you must
enable the Mobile networks options.
Mobile data
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option
must be selected. It is set on by default.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Mobile data
to create a checkmark and activate the
feature.
Data Roaming
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service
provider’s partner networks and access data services when
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Data roaming
to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
Access Point Names
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
(hotspot).
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Access Point Names
.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right
of the name.
Network Operators
Using this feature you can view the current network
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Network operators
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom
of the list.
Important!
You must deactivate data service prior to searching
for an available network.
Note:
Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer
speed and time.
125
Default setup options
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically
search for an available network. You can set this option to
Manual to select a network each time you connect.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Network operators
.
3. Tap
Default setup
.
4. Tap
Manual
to locate and connect to a network
manually, or tap
Automatic
to allow the device to
automatically select a network.
Tethering & portable hotspot
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
USB tethering
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Tethering and portable hotspot
.
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.
3. Tap
USB tethering
to add a checkmark and activate the
feature. The USB tethering icon is displayed at the
top of your screen.
Mobile Hotspot
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Tethering and portable hotspots
➔
Mobile
Hotspot
.
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it
changes to the ON position .
The Mobile Hotspot icon is displayed at the top of
your screen.
3. Tap
Configure
at the bottom of the screen.
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,
Security setting, and Password.
5. Tap
Show password
and
Show advanced options
to see
them displayed.
6. Tap
Save
.
7. Press for the following options:
ON
Changing Your Settings 126
• Timeout settings
: allows you to set the time your device will be
available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
•Help
: provides additional information.
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other
devices
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to
your phone.
2. Find
[Galaxy_Note_II_xxxx]
in the Wi-Fi network list and
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi
hotspot on your device.
The connected device can now use internet through
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Note:
Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be
different depending on the type of the other device.
Help
From the
Tethering and portable hotspot
menu, tap
Help
for additional information
VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
Important!
Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
configure one.
Adding a Basic VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 136.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
VPN
.
3. Tap
Basic VPN
.
4. Tap
Add VPN network
.
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the
Name
field.
127
6. Select a VPN type from the
Type
drop-down menu. The
options are:
•
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
•
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol
Security Pre-Shared Key)
•
L2TP/IPSec RSA
•
IPSec Xauth PSK
•
IPSec Xauth RSA
•
IPSec Hybrid RSA
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields
that are dependent upon the
Type
you entered
previously.
8. Tap the
Show advanced options
check box to display
additional VPN options.
9. Tap
Save
to save your VPN settings.
Adding an IPsec VPN
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 136.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
VPN
.
3. Tap
Advanced IPsec VPN
.
4. Tap
Add VPN connection
.
5. Enter a password and tap
OK
.
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the
VPN
connection name
field.
7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu.
8. Enter any other required information.
9. Tap the
Show advanced options
check box to display
additional VPN options.
10. Tap
Save
to save your VPN settings.
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam.
To activate NFC, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
NFC
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC
field, to turn NFC ON .
ON
Changing Your Settings 128
S Beam
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music Player, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
S Beam
.
2. Tap the
OFF / ON
icon to turn S Beam on .
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-
capable device and the content is transferred.
Nearby devices
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer
to “Activating Wi-Fi” on page 121.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Nearby devices
.
3. Verify Wi-Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with
the device you wish to detect and share content with.
4. Tap the
File sharing
checkbox to create a checkmark
and activate File sharing.
5. Verify (
Nearby devices
) appears at the top of the
screen.
6. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap
OK
.
7. Tap
Shared contents
, then check the media you would
like to share. Tap
OK
.
8. Tap
Device name
, then use the on-screen keyboard to
change the name shown to others. Tap
Save
.
9. Tap
Allowed devices list
, then select the connected
devices you would like to allow.
10. Tap
Not-allowed devices list
, then select the connected
devices you would like to not allow.
11. Tap
Download to
, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or
SD card.
12. Tap
Upload from other devices
, then select the actions
you’ll take when you upload content from other
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always
ask, or Always reject.
ON
129
AllShare Cast
With AllShare Cast, you can wirelessly share your phone's
screen with Wi-Fi-enabled TV using the AllShare Cast Hub
accessory.
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account. There should be no icon in the
Notifications area of the screen.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
AllShare Cast
.
3. Tap the
OFF / ON
icon to turn AllShare Cast on
.
4. Make sure you and the device you want to share with
are connected to the same Wi-Fi network. For more
information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 164.
Your phone automatically scans for other compatible
devices.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect with the
TV.
Note:
This feature allows a connection between your phone
and the optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi
connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the
communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the
phone's display.
Kies via Wi-Fi
Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your
device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.
You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones,
and more.
1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application
if you don’t already have it. You can find it at
samsung.com
.
2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application.
3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network.
4. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Kies via Wi-Fi
.
5. From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network
that your PC is connected to if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Connect to a
Wi-Fi Network” on page 164.
ON
Changing Your Settings 130
Home screen mode
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the
conventional layout of
Basic mode
or provide an easier user
experience for the first-time smartphone users using
Easy
mode
.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Home
screen mode
.
2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the
following options:
•Basic mode
: provides conventional layout for the apps and
widgets on your home screens.
• Easy mode
: provides easier user experience for first-time
smartphone users on the home screens.
3. Tap
Apply
.
Blocking Mode
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Blocking mode
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Blocking mode
slider to the right to turn it on .
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable
incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and
timer, Disable LED indicator.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.
Remove the checkmark from the
Always
field to
configure the
From
and
To
time fields.
ON
131
5. Tap
Allowed contacts
to assign those contacts that are
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will
then appear in the
Allowed contact list
.
Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
The following options display:
Volume
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all
phone sounds in one easy location.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Volume
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.
3. Tap
OK
.
Vibration intensity
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the
vibration is for different options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Vibration intensity
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic
feedback.
Device ringtone
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Device ringtone
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap
OK
.
Device vibration
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Device vibration
.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap
OK
.
Default notifications
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for
notifications and alarms.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Default
notifications
.
Changing Your Settings 132
3. Tap a ringtone and tap
OK
.
Sound and vibration
This option allows you to enable all sounds and vibrations.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Sound and vibration
to create a checkmark and
enable the feature.
System Tone Settings
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the
screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
•Keytones
: makes a sound when you tap a key on the
keyboard.
• Touch sounds
: makes a sound when you touch the screen.
• Screen lock sound
: makes a sound when your screen is
locked or unlocked.
• Haptic feedback
: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys
and on certain UI interactions.
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
The following options display:
• Wallpaper
: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home
screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to
“Changing the Wallpaper”
on page 43.
•LED indicator
: allows you to turn on your LED lights for
charging, low battery, incoming notifications, and voice
recording. The light will turn on by default unless you turn them
off.
• Page buddy
: allows context related pages to be created on the
Home screen. You can select S Pen page, Earphones page,
Docking page, and Roaming page. Tap Page buddy help for
more information. Touch and slide the Page buddy slider to the
right to turn it on .
• Screen mode
: allows you to select from several different color
modes.
•Brightness
: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag
the slider and tap OK.
ON
133
• Auto-rotate screen
: allows you to switch the display
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.
• Screen timeout
: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
• Smart rotation
: disables the auto screen rotation by checking
the orientation of your face and the device.
•Smart stay
: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects
that your face is watching the screen.
• Font style
: allows you to set the font style that your phone will
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider
selection.
•Font size
: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
• Touch key light duration
: allows you to adjust the delay before
the Touch key light automatically turns off.
• Display battery percentage
: allows you to see the battery
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of
the display.
• Auto adjust screen tone
: allows you to save power because
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the
LCD brightness.
Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD
card.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD
card, see “Memory Card” on page 47.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Storage.The available memory displays under the
Total
space
and
Available
space
headings for both Device
memory and SD card.
SD card
Tap
Unmount SD card
to unmount your SD card so that
you can safely remove it, then tap
OK
.
– or –
1. Tap
Format SD card
to re-format your SD card. This will
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,
and photos.
2. Tap
Format SD card
again.
3. Tap
Delete all
to continue or press to cancel.
Changing Your Settings 134
Note:
The
Format SD card
option is only available when your
SD card is mounted.
Power Saving
Power Saving Mode allows you to manage your phone to
conserve power.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Power
saving
.
2. Tap the
OFF / ON
icon next to
Power saving
to turn
Power saving mode on .
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
conserve power:
• CPU power saving
: allows you to limit the maximum
performance of the CPU.
• Screen power saving
: allows you to lower the screen power
level.
• Background color
: allows you to change the background color
on email and internet to save power.
• Turn off haptic feedback
: allows you to turn off vibration when
you tap or touch the screen.
4. Tap
Learn about power saving
to learn about various
ways to conserve battery power.
Battery
See how much battery power is used for device activities.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Battery.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
usage displays in percentages per application.
2. Tap
Screen
,
Cell standby
,
Android System
,
Android OS
,
Media server
,
Device idle
, or any other listed application
to view how it is affecting battery use.
Note:
Other applications may be running that affect battery
use.
Application Manager
You can download and install applications from Play Store or
create applications using the Android SDK and install them
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage
applications.
ON
135
Warning!
Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
Memory Usage
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Application manager
.
2. Tap
Downloaded
,
Running
, or
All
to display memory
usage for that category of applications.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.
Downloaded
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Application manager
.
2. Tap the
Downloaded
tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
Downloaded tabs, press ➔
Sort by size
or
Sort by
name
.
4. To reset your application preferences, press ➔
Reset app preferences
.
Note:
This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,
disabled app notifications, default applications for
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You
will not lose any app data.
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
Running Services
View and control services running on your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Application manager
.
2. Tap the
Running
tab. All the applications that are
currently running on the device display.
Changing Your Settings 136
3. Tap
Show cached processes
to display all the cached
processes that are running. Tap
Show services in use
to
switch back.
4. Tap one of the applications to view application
information.
The following options display:
•Stop
: Stops the application from running on the device. This is
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.
Warning!
Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System.
•Report
: Report failure and other application information.
Note:
Options vary by application.
Location Services
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings
for your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More
settings
➔
Location services
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the service:
• Use wireless networks
: allows applications to use data from
mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.
• Use GPS satellites
: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint
your location.
• Location and Google search
: allows Google to use your
location data for improved search results and other services.
Lock Screen Settings
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see
“Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 12.
Screen Lock
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
for these options:
•Swipe
: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
•Motion
: While tapping and holding the screen, tilt the device
forward to unlock.
137
• Face unlock
: Look at your phone to unlock it.
• Face and voice
: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.
• Pattern
: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
change your screen unlock pattern.
•PIN
: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password
: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
•None
: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will
never lock.
Lock screen options
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.
Note:
The Lock screen options are only available when the
Screen lock
option is set to
Swipe
or
Motion
.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Lock
screen
➔
Lock screen options
.
2. The following options are available:
•Shortcuts
sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Information ticker
sets the news and stock information ticker
to appear across the bottom of the Lock screen. Touch and
slide the slider to the right to turn it on .
•Clock
allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock
screen is active. Enabled by default.
•Dual clock
displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock
screen while you are traveling. Tap the entry to set your home
city. This time zone then becomes the time used by one of
these on-screen clocks. Touch and slide the slider to the right
to turn it on .
• Weather
displays the current area weather on the Lock screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on .
Tap and set both the temperature units (F or C) and a refresh
time.
• Ripple effect
activates/deactivates the ripple effect on the lock
screen when you tap it.
• Ink effect
activates/deactivates the ink effect on the lock
screen when you tap it. the Ripple effect must be activated first.
•Help text
shows help information on the Lock screen.
ON
ON
ON
ON
Changing Your Settings 138
• Camera quick access
provides you with quick access to the
camera function from the Lock screen. When this option has
been activated, touch and hold the lock screen while rotating
the device to the landscape position then release the screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on .
• Wake up in lock screen
requires that you say a command to
wake-up S Voice.
•Set wake-up command
designates your S Voice wake-up
commands. Tap Wake-up S Voice and follow the on-screen
prompts to create a new verbal command.
Note:
These options vary depending on the selected Lock
settings.
Popup Note on lock screen
This option allows the Popup Note feature to be active on
your lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Popup Note on lock screen
to create a checkmark
and activate the feature.
3. From the lock screen, hold down the S Pen button and
double tap the screen to bring up the Popup Note
feature.
Owner information
This option allows you to show owner information on the lock
screen. You can also enter text to display on the lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Lock
screen
➔
Owner information
.
2. Tap the
Show owner info on lock screen
checkbox to
create a checkmark if you want your owner information
displayed.
3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your
lockscreen and tap
OK
.
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security
level for your phone.
Encryption
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD
card each time it is connected:
ON
139
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Encrypt device
. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
3. Tap
Encrypt external SD card
to enable the encryption
on SD card data that requires a password be entered
each time the microSD card is connected.
Tip:
Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Set up/change password
Use this option to set up your password when one is first
required or change your current password.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
➔
Set up/change password
.
2. Enter a new password and tap
Confirm
.
3. Enter the new password again and tap
Confirm
.
Set up SIM card lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also
change your SIM PIN number.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Set up SIM card lock
.
3. Tap
Lock SIM card
, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK
.
Note:
You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change
your SIM PIN code.
4. Tap
Change SIM PIN
.
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
Make passwords visible
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
touch them while entering passwords.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
Changing Your Settings 140
2. Tap
Make passwords visible
to create a checkmark and
enable or disable the display of password characters.
Device Administrators
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or
more administration applications that control your device for
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device
security policies.
Some of the features a device administration application
might control are:
•
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the
device is restored to factory settings.
•
Automatically locking the device.
•
Restoring factory settings on the device.
Note:
If a device uses multiple enabled administration
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Device administrators
.
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If
no device administrators are listed, you can download
them from the Play Store.
Unknown sources
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Unknown sources
.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Warning!
Enabling this option causes your phone and personal
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
Trusted Credentials
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
remove it.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Trusted credentials
.
141
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
• System
: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
in the ROM of your device.
•User
: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.
A scrolling screen displays the details.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap
Disable
to disable a System certificate or
Remove
to
remove a User certificate.
Caution!
When you disable a system CA certificate, the
Disable
button changes to
Enable
, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.
5. Tap
OK
to return to the certificate list.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Install from device storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
Note:
You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Install from device storage
, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
Clear credentials
Clear stored credentials.
Note:
This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
certificates.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Clear credentials
to remove all certificates.
Changing Your Settings 142
One-handed operation
The one-handed operation settings help you to use your
phone keypads easily with only one hand.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
One-
handed operation
.
2. The following options are available:
• Keypad & in-call buttons
: allows you to adjust the position of
the dialing keypad and in-call buttons to the left or the right to
make it easier to use with one hand.
• Samsung keyboard
: allows you to adjust the position of the
Samsung keyboard to the left or the right to make it easier to
use with one hand.
•Calculator
: allows you to adjust the position of the calculator
keypad to the left or the right to make it easier to use with one
hand.
• Unlock pattern
: allows you to adjust the scale of the unlock
pattern for use with one hand.
• Learn about on-handed operation
: provides more information
about using one-handed operation.
Language and input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set onscreen keyboard
options.
Language
You can change the language used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Language
.
2. Tap a language from the list.
Keyboards and Input Methods
You can change the keyboard used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Default
and select a keyboard.
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.
3. Tap
Set up input methods
.
4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you
would like to configure the settings for.
143
5. Based on your selection of input method, the
appropriate settings will appear and are explained
below.
Google voice typing settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Google voice typing
.
3. The following options are available:
• Choose input languages
: tap on a language that you want to
input. Select
Automatic
to use the local language or select a
language from the list.
• Block offensive words
:
tap to create a checkmark and enable
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of
your voice-input Google typing.
• Download offline speech recognition
: Enables voice input
while offline.
Samsung Keyboard settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Samsung keyboard
.
• Portrait keypad types
allows you to choose a keypad
configuration (Qwerty [default] or 3x4 Keyboard).
• Input languages
sets the input language. Tap a language from
the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected
language.
• Predictive text
enables predictive text entry mode. This must
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the slider
to the right to turn it on .
• Continuous input
allows you to type words by swiping
between on-screen keys.
• Pen detection
displays the handwriting pad whenever the pen
is detected.
• One-handed operation
allows youto set your keyboard for use
with one hand.
• Handwriting
enables the device to recognize on-screen
handwriting and convert it to text.
• Advanced
displays the following advanced options:
–
Auto capitalization
automatically capitalizes the first letter of
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).
ON
Changing Your Settings 144
–
Auto-punctuate
automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen
QWERTY keyboard.
–
Character preview
provides an automatic preview of the
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful
when multiple characters are available within one key.
–
Key-tap vibration
enables vibration feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
–
Key-tap sound
enables auditory feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
•Tutorial
launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings
resets the keyboard settings back to their
original configuration.
Predictive Text Settings
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Samsung keyboard
.
3.
Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to turn it ON .
4. Tap
Predictive text
.
5. The following options are available:
• Personalized data
: allows you to use personal language that
you have added to make your prediction results better.
• Learn from Facebook
: allows you to login to your Facebook
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.
• Learn from Gmail
: allows you to login to your Gmail account
so your phone can learn your Gmail style.
• Learn from Twitter
: allows you to login to your Twitter account
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.
• Clear remote data
: deletes anonymous data that is stored on
the personalization server.
• Clear personalized data
: removes all personalized data that
you have entered.
• privacy policy
: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow
the on-screen instructions.
Swype Keypad Settings
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Swype
.
ON
145
3. Tap
How to Swype
to view an on-screen manual for
Swype.
4. Tap
Preferences
to alter these settings:
• Vibrate on keypress
: activates a vibration sensation as you
enter text using the keypad.
• Sound on keypresses
: turns on sounds generated by the
Swype application.
• Show helpful tips
: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.
•Auto-spacing
: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start
the next word.
• Auto-capitalization
: automatically capitalizes the first letter of
a sentence.
•Show complete trace
: once enabled, sets wether or not to
display the complete Swype path.
• Pop-up on keypress
: once enabled, displays a character
above an on-screen key while typing.
• Next word prediction
: once enabled, predicts the next word in
your text string based on your current text entries.
Note:
If incorrect words are being entered as you type,
disabled this feature.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary
: once enabled, deletes any words
you have added to Swype’s dictionary.
•Version
: displays the software version information.
5. Tap
Language Options
to activate and select the current
text input language. Default language is US English.
6. Tap
Swype Connect
to activate social media
personalization and configure data settings.
• Facebook
: allows you to log into your current Facebook
account from where contact names are added to your Swpe’s
personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text
fields. Helps recognize familiar names.
•Twitter
: allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account
from where names and words are added to your personal
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words.
•Gmail
: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from
where existing contact information is added to your personal
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.
Changing Your Settings 146
• Contribute data usage
: when enabled, allows the Nuance
®
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.
• Cellular data
: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,
language downloads, and other related features via your
existing data connection.
7. Tap
Personal dictionary
to access and manage your
personal dictionary.
8. Tap
Updates
to update the application if new software
is available.
Speech Settings
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice
input.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Voice search
to configure the following:
• Language
: Choose a language for your voice input.
• Speech output
: Sets whether you will use speech output
always or only when using hands-free.
• Block offensive words
: Enable or disable blocking of
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
Google searches.
• Hotword detection
: Enable to being able to launch voice
search by saying the word “Google”.
• Download offline speech recognition
: Enables voice input
while offline.
3. Tap
Text-to-speech output
and select
Google Text-to-
speech Engine
or
Samsung TTS
.
4. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
• Language
: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech
: allows you to view Open
Source Licenses.
• Settings for Samsung TTS
: allows you to view Open Source
Licenses.
• Install voice data
: allows you to install voice data for speech
synthesis.
5. Scroll down to the
General
section to access the
following options:
• Speech rate
: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
147
• Listen to an example
: Play a sample of speech synthesis
(available if voice data is installed).
6. Tap the ON/OFF icon next to
Driving mode
to
turn it on and enable incoming calls and notifications to
be read out automatically.
Pointer speed
This option sets your Pointer speed.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Pointer speed
then drag the slider to the right to go
faster or to the left to go slower.
3. Tap
OK
to save your setting.
Back up and reset
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.
Back Up My Data
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of
your settings and data.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Back up
and reset
.
2. Tap
Back up my data
to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings
to the Google server.
Backup Account
If you have enabled the
Back up my data
option, then the
Backup account
option is available.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Back up
and reset
.
2. Tap
Backup account
and tap your Google Gmail account
or tap
Add account
to set your Google Gmail account to
be backed up to the Google server.
Automatic Restore
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of
your backed up settings and data will be restored.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Back up
and reset
.
2. Tap
Automatic restore
to enable or disable automatic
restoration of settings from the Google server.
ON
Changing Your Settings 148
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings
to the factory default settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Back up
and reset
.
2. Tap
Factory data reset
.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
information.
3. Tap
Reset device
, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
Warning!
Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data
from your phone and internal SD card, including your
Google account, system and application data and
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not
erase current system software, bundled
applications, and external SD card files such as
music and photos.
Add Account
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.
Adding an Account
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Add
account
.
2. Tap one of the account types.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
A green circle will appear next to the account type once
you have created an account. Your email account will
also be displayed in the
Accounts
section of the main
Settings menu.
Removing an Account
Important!
Removing an account also deletes all of its
messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings.
2. Tap the account which is located in the
Accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
149
4. Tap
Remove account
, then tap
Remove
account
at the
prompt to remove the account and delete all its
messages, contacts, and other data.
Synchronizing Accounts
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings.
2. Tap the account which is located in the
Accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
4. Tap
Sync now
to synchronize your account or tap
Sync
all
to synchronize all your accounts. Tap
Cancel sync
to
stop the synchronization.
5. Tap
Settings
to access your account settings.
Motion
The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion
activation services. For more information on using gestures,
see “Using Gestures” on page 35.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Motion
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your
screen to activate Motion.
Caution!
Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results. To learn how to properly control
motions, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Motion
➔
Learn
about motions
.
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
activate the feature. A checkmark is displayed.
• Quick glance
: Once enable, you can check key information at
a glance by reaching towards your device.
•Direct call
: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
device to your ear.
•Smart alert
: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.
• Double tap to top
: Once enabled, double tap the top of the
device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list.
• Tilt to zoom
: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where
content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two
points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to
zoom in or out.
ON
Changing Your Settings 150
• Pan to move icon
: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it
detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new
location.
• Pan to browse images
:
Once enabled, touch and hold a
desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left
or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally
around the large on-screen image.
• Shake to update
: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan
for Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web
page, etc.
• Turn over to mute/pause
: Once enabled, mute incoming calls
and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on
a surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified
Gesture.
• Advanced settings
: allows you to access additional settings
for Quick glance, Gyroscope calibration, Tilt to zoom, Pan to
move icon, and Pan to browse images.
• Learn about motions
: provides additional help on using the
different motions.
• Palm swipe to capture
: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.
• Palm touch to mute/pause
: Once enabled, you can pause any
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from
the screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing
to play the current video or unmuting the current sound.
• Learn about hand motions
: provides additional help on the
hand motions such as Palm swipe to capture and Palm touch
to mute/pause.
S Pen Settings
This menu allows you to customize settings for the S Pen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. The following options are available:
•Dominant hand
: allows you to set your phone to Left handed
or Right handed.
• Pen attach/detach sound
: allows you to select a sound to be
played whenever the pen is attached or detached.
151
• Open Popup Note
: automatically opens Popup Note whenever
the pen is detached.
• Battery saving
: disables the pen detection feature while the
pen is attached to save battery power.
• S Pen keeper
: sounds an alert and displays a pop-up when
you walk with the device without attaching the pen.
•Air view
: When the S pen tip is near the screen for a while, the
S pen hovering feature will be provided. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on .
• Sound and haptic feedback
: allows you to hear sound and
sense haptic feedback when using your S Pen
• Quick command settings
: allows you to create pen gestures
to open selected apps or perform tasks.
• S Pen help
: provides additional information about S Pen.
Accessory Settings
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when
using a car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Accessory
.
2. Tap
Dock sound
to play sounds when inserting or
removing the phone from the dock.
3. Tap
Audio output mode
to use the external dock
speakers when the phone is docked.
4. Tap
Desk home screen display
to display the desk home
screen whenever the phone is docked.
5. Tap
Audio output
to set your Audio output to Stereo or
Surround.
Date and time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Date
and time
.
2. Tap
Automatic date and time
to allow the network to set
the date and time.
3. Tap
Automatic time zone
to allow the network to set the
time zone.
Important!
Deactivate
Automatic date and time
to manually set
the rest of the options.
4. Tap
Set date
and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Month
,
Day
, and
Year
then tap
Set
.
ON
Changing Your Settings 152
5. Tap
Set time
and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Hour
,
Minute
, and
PM
/
AM
, then tap
Set
.
6. Tap
Select time zone
, then tap a time zone.
7. Optional: Tap
Use 24-hour format
. If this is not selected
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
8. Tap
Select date format
and tap the date format type.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note:
You can download accessibility applications from Play
Store and manage their use here.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Tap the
Auto-rotate screen
to automatically rotate the
screen from landscape to portrait when you rotate your
phone.
3. Tap the
Screen timeout
option to timeout the
accessibility feature after a defined amount of time.
4. Tap the
Speak passwords
option to activate this feature
which reads out password information.
5. Tap the
Answering/ending calls
option to be able to
accept incoming calls by pressing the home key or end
calls using the power key.
6. Tap the
Accessibility shortcut
option to allow the
accessibility shortcut under the device options to be
used by pressing and holding the power key.
7. Tap the
TalkBack
option to activate the TalkBack
feature.
Note:
TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
to help blind and low-vision users.
Important!
TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,
except passwords, including personal data and
credit card numbers. It may also log your user
interface interactions with the device.
8. Tap the
Font size
field to change the size of the fonts
used on the device within menus, options, etc. Choose
from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.
153
9. Tap the
Negative colors
field to reverse the display of
on-screen colors from White text on a Black
background to Black text on a White background.
10. Tap the
Text-to-speech output
field to adjust your text-
to-speech settings. For more information, refer to
“Speech Settings” on page 146.
11. Tap
Enhance web accessibility
if want to allow apps to
install scripts from Google that make their Web content
more accessible. Tap
Allow
.
12. Tap the
Sound balance
field and use the slider to set the
Left and Right balance when using a stereo device.
13. Tap the
Mono audio
field to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use
with a single earbud/earphone.
14. Tap the
Turn off all sounds
field to mute every sound
made by the device during taps, selections,
notifications, etc.
15. Tap the
Tap and hold delay
field to select a time interval
for this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.
Developer options
Use the Developer options to set options for application
development.
Warning!
The developer options are intended for development
use only. They can cause errors to occur on your
device and with the applications you have on it.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Developer options field, to turn ON .
3. The following options are available:
• Desktop backup password
: allows you to protect your
desktop with a backup password ID.
•Stay awake
: with the Stay awake option enabled, your screen
will never sleep while you are charging the phone.
• Protect SD card
: requires apps to ask your permission before
accessing data on your SD card.
• USB debugging
: allows debugging when the device is
attached to a PC by a USB cable.
ON
Changing Your Settings 154
• Allow mock locations
: used by developers when developing
location-based applications.
• Select app to be debugged
: allows developers to select a
specific app to debug.
• Wait for debugger
: specified apps must have debugger
attached before executing.
• Show touches
: Displays touch interactions on the screen.
• Show pointer location
: Highlights the data that was touched
on the screen.
• Show layout boundaries
: displays clip bounds, margins, etc.
• Show GPU view updates
: flashes views inside windows when
drawn with GPU.
• Show screen updates
: Areas of the screen flash when they
update.
• Window animation scale
: Configure the scale for animation
(ranges from off to 10x).
• Transition animation scale
: Configure the scale for
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).
• Animator duration scale
: Configure the scale for duration
when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).
• Disable hardware overlays
: Assigns the work of redendering
to the GPU.
• Force GPU rendering
: allows the use of 2D hardware
accelerations in applications.
• Strict mode
: Makes the screen flash when applications
perform long operations on the main thread.
• Show CPU usage
: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.
• GPU rendering profile
: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.
• Enable traces
: Enables/disables on-screen tracing based on
an available parameter.
• Do not keep activities
: destroys every activity as soon as the
application is closed.
• Limit background processes
: sets the number of processes
that can run in the background.
• Show all ANRs
: displays a prompt when applications running
in the background are not responding.
About Device
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,
and software build number.
155
To access phone information:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
About
device
.
2. The following information displays:
• Software update
: allows you to update your phone software, if
available. For more information, refer to
“Software Update”
on page 155.
• Status
: displays the battery status, the level of the battery
(percentage), network, signal strength, mobile network type,
service state, roaming status, mobile network state, the phone
number for this device, ERI version, IMEI number, IP address,
Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up
time, and Device status.
• Legal information
: This option displays information about
Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service,
Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more
pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and
terms, then press
to return to the Settings menu.
• Model number
: displays the phone’s model number.
• Android version
: displays the android version loaded on this
handset.
• Baseband version
: displays the baseband version loaded on
this handset.
•Kernel version
: displays the kernel version loaded on this
handset.
• Build number
: displays the software, build number.
Note:
Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional
information please contact your AT&T service
representative.
Software Update
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access
this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
About
device
➔
Software update
.
2. Tap
Check for updates
.
Changing Your Settings 156
3. At the
Software update
prompt, tap
OK
to continue.
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if
available), otherwise, when the
Current software is up
to date
prompt is displayed, tap
OK
.
5. When updating software, once the update file is
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If
you want to resume the update before the selected
time, tap
Continue update
.
157
Section 9: Connections
This section describes the various connections your phone
can make including accessing the Internet with your
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.
Internet
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to
the basic features.
Accessing the Mobile Web
To access the Browser:
From the Home screen, tap
Internet
.
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.
Navigating with the Browser
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with
your finger in an up or down motion.
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across
a web page.
4. To return to a previous page, press .
5. To move forward to a web page, press .
Zooming in and out of the Browser
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser.
After tapping on a link or article, use one of these methods:
•
Tilting
: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device
back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first
enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer
to
“Motion”
on page 149.
•
Double tap
: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to
zoom in or out.
•
Pinching
: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom
in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).
Browser Options
1. From the home page, press to access the
following options:
•Home
: displays the home web page.
• New window
: displays a new window so you can browse
multiple URLs. For more information, refer to
“Adding and
Deleting Windows”
on page 158.
•Add bookmark
: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list
Connections 158
• Add shortcut to home screen
: allows you to add a shortcut to
your Home screen.
• Share page
: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a
message.
• Find on page
: allows you to search in the current page.
• Desktop view
: allows you to assign the browser to display the
current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display
as it would appear on a desktop computer).
• Save for offline reading
: allows you to store the current page
in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your
Internet connection.
•Brightness
: allows you to set the screen brightness.
• Downloads
: displays the download history.
•Print
: allows you to print the screen or web page on a
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.
•Settings
: allows you to modify your web settings. For more
information, refer to
“Browser Settings”
on page 161.
Enter a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these
steps:
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.
The website displays.
Search the Internet
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these
steps:
1. From the Google homepage, tap the URL field.
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen
keypad and tap
Go
.
3. Tap a link to view the website.
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.
To add a new window, follow these steps:
1. From your browser, press ➔
New window
.
A new browser window is opened.
159
2. Tap (
Windows
) to see thumbnails of all open
windows.
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page
thumbnail to delete the window.
Going Incognito
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites
outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this
incognito window won’t appear within your browser history
or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on
your device.
Note:
Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your
device after you exit the incognito mode.
To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap (
Windows
) ➔
(
Incognito
).
2. A new browser window displays.
Note:
The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new
browser window while you are in this mode.
To exit from the incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap (
Windows
) ➔
(
New window
).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the
incognito window.
3. Tap next to the incognito listing to delete this
window.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.
1. From the Home webpage, tap (
Bookmarks
).
The Bookmarks page is displayed.
2. Press to display the following options:
• List/Thumbnail view
: Select
Thumbnail view
(default) to view
a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select
List
view
to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
• Create folder
: Creates a new folder in which to store new
bookmarks.
2
2
2
Connections 160
• Change order
: Rearranges the current bookmarks.
• Move to folder
: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected
folder.
•Delete
: Erases selected bookmarks.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and
hold a bookmark for the following options:
•Open
: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.
• Open in new window
: Opens the webpage in a new window.
• Edit bookmark
: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the
bookmark. For more information, refer to
“Editing
Bookmarks”
on page 160.
• Add shortcut to home screen
: Adds a shortcut to the
bookmarked webpage to your phone’s Home screen.
• Share link
: Allows you to share a URL address using many
different options.
•Copy link URL
: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a
message.
• Delete bookmark
: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more
information, refer to
“Deleting Bookmarks”
on page 160.
• Set as homepage
: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.
Adding Bookmarks
1. From any webpage, tap ➔ .
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address,
and Location.
3. Tap
Save
.
4.
Saved to bookmarks
will appear at the bottom of the
page.
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
2. Tap
Edit bookmark
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address,
and Location.
4. Tap
Save
.
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
2. Tap
Delete bookmark
.
3. At the
Delete
confirmation window, tap
OK
.
161
Emptying the Cookies
A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a
website during navigation. In addition to containing some
site-specific information, it can also contain some personal
information (such as a username and password) which can
pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear
these cookies from your phone at any time.
1. From the Home webpage, press ➔
Settings
➔
Privacy and security
➔
Clear all cookie data
.
2. At the
Clear
prompt, tap
OK
to delete the cookies or tap
Cancel
to exit.
Using your History
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to
previously unmarked web pages.
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔
History
tab.
A list of your most recently visited websites is
displayed with Name and URL address.
2. Tap on a category such as
Today
,
Last 7 days
,
or
Most
visited
.
3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
4. Press ➔
Clear history
to delete the History list.
Saved Pages
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites
that you have saved.
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔
Saved pages
tab.
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with Name
and URL address. The webpages that have been visited
the most will appear at the top.
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
Browser Settings
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these
steps:
1. Tap
Internet
➔ ➔
Settings
.
2. The following options are available:
General
• Set home page
: Sets the current home page for the Web
browser.
•Form auto-fill
: allows you to fill in web forms with a single tap.
• Auto-fill text
: allows you to enter text to be used in the Form
auto-fill feature.
Connections 162
Privacy and security
• Clear cache
: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap
OK
to
complete the process.
•Clear history
: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap
OK
to
complete the process.
• Show security warnings
: Notifies you if there is a security
issue with the current website.
• Accept cookies
: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and
read cookies from your device.
• Clear all cookie data
: Deletes all current browser cookie files.
• Remember form data
: Allows the device to store data from
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
• Clear form data
: Deletes any stored data from previously filled
out forms. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Enable location
: Allows websites to request access to your
location.
• Clear location access
: Clears location access for all websites.
Tap
OK
to complete the process.
• Remember passwords
: Stores usernames and passwords for
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Clear passwords
: Deletes any previously stored usernames or
passwords. Tap
OK
to complete the process.
• Enable notifications
: Allows website notifications. Select
Always on, On demand, or Off.
• Clear notifications
: Deletes website notification access
information.
Accessibility
• Force zoom
: allows you to override the website’s request to
control zoom.
• Text size
: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size
using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and
minimize the font size using a slider bar.
• Inverted screen rendering
: allows you to preview a website
page, select Inverted rendering (black becomes white and vice
versa), and adjust the Contrast using a slider bar.
Advanced
• Select search engine
: allows you to set your default search
engine to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.
• Open in background
: New pages are launched in a separate
page and displayed behind the current one. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
163
• Enable JavaScript
: Enables Javascript for the current Web
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Allow multiple tabs per app
: Allows you to use multiple
navigation tabs per application.
• Enable plug-ins
: Allows the download of plug-ins such as
Adobe Flash.
•Default storage
: Allows you to set your default storage to
Phone or Memory Card.
• Website settings
: View advanced settings for individual
websites.
• Default zoom
: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,
or Close.
• Open pages in overview
: Shows an overview of newly opened
web pages.
• Auto-fit pages
: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much
of the screen as possible.
• Block pop-ups
: Prevents popup advertisement or windows
from appearing onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable
this function.
• Text encoding
: Adjusts the current text encoding.
• Reset to default
: Clears all browser data and resets all settings
to default.
Bandwidth management
• Preload search results
: Allows the browser to preload high
confidence search results in the background to help speed up
searches.
• Page preloading
: Allows the browser to preload pages in the
background.
•Load images
: Allows web page images to be loaded along
with the other text components of a loaded website.
Labs
• Quick controls
: allows you to open quick controls and hide the
app and URL bars by swiping your thumb from the left or right
edge of the screen.
• Full screen
: allows you to access Full screen mode and hide
the status bar.
Connections 164
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
Turning Wi-Fi On
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.
Note:
When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.
Manually add your new network connection
1. Tap
Add Wi-Fi network
.
2. Enter the
Network SSID
. This is the name of your
Wireless Access Point.
3. Tap the
Security
field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s
password.
ON
165
5. Tap
Save
to store the new information and connect to
your target WAP.
Note:
The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset
your device back to its factory default settings.
Turning Wi-Fi Off
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF .
Note:
Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your use times.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Tap
Scan
.
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a
glance:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a
communication issue with the target Wireless
Access Point (WAP).
Displays when connected to another device using
Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
Direct” on page 166.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your
device’s Wi-Fi service, including:
•
Network notification when an open network is available
•
Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy
•
Checking for Wi-Fi Internet service
•
Automatically connecting to an AT&T Wi-Fi hotspot when detected
•
Viewing your device’s MAC and IP Address
OFF
Connections 166
To access the Advanced Wi-Fi menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press ➔
Advanced
.
For more information, refer to “Advanced Wi-Fi Settings” on
page 121.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
Note:
See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi
Direct.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the
Wi-Fi Direct
button.
4. Repeat
steps 1 - 3
on the other device you want to
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,
may be different.
5. On your phone, tap
Scan
.
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,
tap on it.
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap
Accept
for the
connection to be made.
8. Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected
in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the
icon will display at the top of your screen.
9. To change your Device name, press ➔
Rename
device
.
10. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press
➔
Help
.
Sharing Information with Connected Device
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the
connected device, follow these steps:
1. View the information that you want to share. For
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in
your camera viewer or
My Files
folder, then tap the
Share,
Share via,
or
Send via
option.
2. Tap the
Wi-Fi Direct
option.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,
Android_49ba.
ON
167
4. The file is transferred and the other device will receive
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been
received. The file can be found in
My files
➔
sdcard0
in
the
ShareViaWifi
folder.
Note:
Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
shared folder information may differ.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Smart
Wi-Fi
.
2. Read the License Agreement and tap
Accept
to
continue.
3. At the Welcome screen, tap
OK
.
4. At the Initial Setting screen, tap
Yes
if you want AT&T
Smart Wi-Fi to automatically connect to any hotspot
that is available for public use. Otherwise, tap
No
.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.
For more information on how to use this application, go to
www.att.com/smartwifi
.
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on
your device, see “NFC” on page 127.
S Beam
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music Player, and more. For more information,
refer to “S Beam” on page 128.
Connections 168
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is
usually up to approximately 30 feet.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON .
When active, appears within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF .
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
•
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
•
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other
Bluetooth devices
ON
OFF
169
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON .
3. Tap
Bluetooth
.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔
Rename device
.
2. Enter a new name.
3. Tap
OK
to complete the rename process.
To make your device visible:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔
Visible
time-out
.
•
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other
devices for pairing and communication.
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility
to time-out.
To show received files:
From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔
Received files
.
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
Scan
to search
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the
discovery and authentication process.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. Tap
Scan
. Your device will display a list of discovered
in-range Bluetooth devices.
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap
OK
.
5. The external device will then have to also accept the
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
ON
Connections 170
Note:
Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth
compatible devices.
Note:
Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
Disconnecting a paired device
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your phone, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the
connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap
OK
to confirm disconnection.
Note:
Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a paired device (unpair)
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you re-
enter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap next to the
previously paired device. This opens the connected
device’s menu options.
3. Tap
Unpair
to delete the paired device.
4. Tap
Rename
to change the name of the paired device.
5. Tap
Call audio
to enable or disable call audio from the
paired device.
6. Tap
Media audio
to enable or disable media audio from
the paired device.
171
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or
other items using a Bluetooth connection.
Note:
Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
.
3. Press ➔
Import/Export
➔
Share namecard via
.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each
entry you select.
5. Tap
Done
.
6. Tap
Bluetooth
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.
Note:
The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your
notifications list.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data
cable using various USB connection modes.
Storage
: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.
Kies air
: this application allows you to sync your Windows PC
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the
same Wi-Fi network.
Kies
: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your
devices.
Note:
To sync your device to your PC, it is highly
recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is
available at
http://www.samsung.com/kies
(for Windows/
Mac).
Connections 172
Note:
If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your
computer.
Connecting as a Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note:
The file directory of the memory card displays as a
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up
window displays on the PC when connected.
2. On the PC pop-up, click
Open device to view files
.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Kies air
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi
network. You can view and share call logs, videos, photos,
music, bookmarks, ringtones, and even send SMS messages
from your PC.
To use the Kies air, follow these steps:
1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and
from your PC.
2. On your phone, from the Home screen, tap ➔
Kies air
.
Note:
The first time you use Kies air, you will need to download
the application from the Market.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
4. At the
Install
screen, tap
Ok
.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the
updated application from the Play Store.
6. From the Kies air homescreen, tap
Start
.
A web URL is displayed on your phone screen.
173
7. From your PC, enter the URL in your web browser.
8. On your phone, an Access Request prompt is
displayed. Tap
Allow
to continue.
9. Tap the
Remember for today
checkbox if you will be
using Kies air with the same PC later.
10. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed
asking if you want to run this application. Click
Run
to
continue.
11. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your
phone, the icon appears at the top of your screen.
12. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share
information between your phone and PC.
13. To exit the Kies air application, tap
Stop
on your phone,
then close out the web browser on your PC.
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam. For information on
NFC and NFC related features, see “NFC” on page 127.
Applications 174
Section 10: Applications
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is
already described in another section of this user manual,
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
Note:
This manual only addresses applications that have been
loaded on your [device/computer/tablet] as of the date
of purchase. Information concerning third party
applications that you may choose to download from the
Google Play Store or otherwise should be obtained
fromthe application provider directly and not from
Samsung.
Tip:
To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,
see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 40.
AllShare Play
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung
device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs
on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying
connected easy.
AllShare Play allows users to share their in-device media
content with other external devices using DLNA certified™
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external
devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can
be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.
AllShare Definitions:
AllShare
This uses the traditional DLNA
technology for sharing multimedia
(photos, videos, or music) to your
Samsung Smart TV and other DLNA
devices.
175
Important!
You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using
this application. For more information, refer to “Wi-
Fi Settings” on page 121. For more information,
refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page
12.
Important!
The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as AllShare Play, ChatON, and
Media Hub.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AllShare Play
.
The AllShare Play screen is displayed.
2. If prompted, read the on-screen message about
network charges and tap
OK
to continue and return to
the main AllShare Play screen.
3. Tap
Start
and follow the on-screen prompts.
The application contains two separate streaming media
options:
AllShare Play
This new feature builds on the previous
AllShare feature. It includes features
such as Web storage integration and
social networking integration. This is a
Web service that requires using a
Samsung account.
AllShare Play/Group
Cast
A subset feature of AllShare Play, this
allows you to mirror photos and
multimedia presentations with other
members of your current Wi-Fi group.
Users must be on the same Wi-Fi and
provide an access code to join the
group.
AllShare Cast
(with
Hub accessory)
This feature functions with an external
Wi-Fi AllShareCast Hub connected to a
TV. It allows you to fully mirror what is
currently displayed on your device to the
external TV.
Applications 176
•Registered Storage
: allows you to receive and playback media
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming
content.
• Registered Devices
: allows you to stream/share selected
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.
Configuring AllShare Settings
The AllShare Play™ application must first be configured
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and
external device acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AllShare Play
.
2. Press and then tap
Settings
and configure the
following settings as desired:
•Registered Storage
: allows you to add a Web storage location.
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able
to use AllShare Play.
• Registered Devices
: defaults to your phone. This indicates the
source of the streaming images and videos. Use the main
screen to add more external devices.
• Setting up web services
: allows you to set up external Web
services by signing in to external sites such as Facebook,
Twitter, YouTube, etc.
• Auto Upload photos from mobile
: allows you to setup
automatic upload of images from your device to those storage
locations specified within the Web storage list.
• Video quality settings
: allows you to setup the video quality for
streamed video content.
•Lock AllShare Play
: allows you to restrict access to AllShare
Play by requiring a user enter the currently active and
associated Samsung account password. Tap
Locking
AllShare Play
to activate/deactivate the feature.
• Language
: allows you select a display language.
• About
: displays application information.
•Contact Us
: allows you to contact the AllShare team via a new
email from an available email account.
177
Sharing Media via AllShare Play to a Target
Device
Important!
Make sure all communicating devices are
connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch AllShare on the target device (such as an
Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AllShare Play
.
3. Tap your device name from the
Devices
list.
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,
Files, or Info) and select a file.
•
Touch and hold to select multiple files.
•
A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to
place a green check mark alongside it.
6. Tap (
Stream to connected devices
) to begin
streaming the selected files.
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-
screen Allow button to continue.
Note:
At this stage your device is requesting access to share
media with the external source.
8. Confirm (
AllShare Controller enabled
) appears in
the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate
you are using your device as the media source.
AllShare Play Screen Sharing via Group Cast
Important!
Verify all of your recipients are connected to the
same Wi-Fi.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Gallery
.
2. Tap ➔
Group Cast
.
3. If prompted, read the on-screen notification and tap
OK
to continue and return to the main AllShare Play
screen.
4. Enter a security PIN and tap
Done
. This process makes
sure only desired recipients can view your shared
image.
2
Applications 178
5. Re-enter you PIN and tap
Done
. The device then waits
for other connected recipients to accept the connection
and enter the PIN on their screens.
– or –
Tap
Start Group Cast anyway
to continue the process
while your users connect.
You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image,
users will instantaneously see the same gestures and also be
able to interact.
Note:
The newly altered image (with markups and comments)
can not be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the
current image and save it to your Clipboard. For more
information, refer to “Using Gestures” on page 35.
AT&T Code Scanner
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR
and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN)
barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Code Scanner
.
Note:
The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will
need to download the updated application from the
Market. When the Market page displays, tap
Update
. For
more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 197.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap
Accept
to
continue.
4. At the My Profile screen, tap
OK
to allow your location
information to be used or tap
Don’t Allow
to bypass.
5. Enter your information in the My Profile section.
6. Tap
ON
to activate your profile. This allows the
application to customize your results. For example,
your zip code may help to deliver a coupon for a
restaurant in your neighborhood. You can toggle the
activation button between ON and OFF.
7. Tap
Done
.
8. Read the tutorial and tap
Next
until you are at the end
of the tutorial. Tap
Finish
.
179
9. Position your phone approximately 2-5 inches from the
barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within
the window. Keep your phone steady for best results.
10. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It
may take several seconds.
11. After the scan, tap
Yes
to open the web page to view
the information on the barcode that was scanned.
AT&T FamilyMap
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless
phone or PC and know that your family's location information
is secure and private.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T FamilyMap
.
Note:
The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to
download the application from the Market. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 197.
2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, enter your
Phone Number and Password in the appropriate fields
and tap
Submit
.
Note:
To sign up for service, visit
http://www.att.com/familymap
for more information.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
AT&T Locker
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient
place; the AT&T cloud. For more information, refer to “AT&T
Locker” on page 86.
AT&T Navigator
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local
searches.
Important!
You must have a data plan to use this feature.
Note:
These services require the purchase of a subscription.
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Navigator
.
Applications 180
2. Read the
Terms of Service
and tap
Accept
to
acknowledge the terms of use.
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T
Navigator main screen displays.
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to
purchase.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
AT&T Ready2Go
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-
Fi and many more features. For more information, refer to
“Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go” on page 12.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use. For more information,
refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 167.
Calculator
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also
keeps a history of recent calculations.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Calculator
.
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric
keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.
4. Enter the second number.
5. To view the result, tap equals (
=
).
6. To view calculator history, tap located at the
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past
calculations is displayed. Tap again to display
the calculator keypad.
7. To clear the calculator history, press ➔
Clear
history
.
8. To change the text size, press ➔
Text size
. Tap
Small, Medium, or Large.
181
9. Press ➔
One-handed operation on
to set the
display so that it is easier to use the calculator with one
hand. Press ➔
One-handed operation off
to turn it
off.
10. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to
display the scientific calculator.
Calendar
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act
as a reminder, if necessary.
To access the Calendar:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Calendar
.
2. Tap (
Show More
) to display these tabs:
•Year
: displays the Year view.
•Month
: displays the Month view.
• Week
: displays the Week view.
•Day
: displays the Day view.
•List
: displays the List view.
•Task
: allows you to search for tasks.
3. Tap (
Create event
) to create a new Calendar
event.
4. Tap
Today
to display the current date indicated by a
blue box.
5. Tap
Calendars
to select the calendar options that you
want displayed.
6. Press and select one of the following options:
•Go to
: displays a specific date.
•Delete
: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,
or an individual event.
•Search
: allows you to search within your current events.
•Sync
: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has
been opened.
• Settings
: displays a list of configurable settings.
7. Tap (
Handwriting mode
) to activate handwriting
mode. This allows you to jot down freehand notes
using your S pen or finger.
Calendar Settings
1. From any Calendar view, press ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap
Month view styles
and select an option.
3. Tap
Week view
and select a type:
Timeline
or
Analog
.
Applications 182
4. Tap
First day of week
and select either
Local default,
Saturday, Sunday
or
Monday
.
5. Tap
Hide declined events
to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
6. Tap
Lock time zone
(to lock event time based on your
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone
from within the
Select time zone
field.
7. Tap
Show week number
to display the week numbers
along the side of the week entries.
8. Tap
Calendars
and select the type of general
synchronization settings you want. A check mark
indicates selection.
9. Tap
Handwriting settings
and configure handwriting-
related calendar settings such as: First day of week
and Show week number.
10. Tap
Set alerts & notifications
to adjust the event
notification method. Choose from:
Alert
,
Status bar
notification
, and
Off
.
11. Tap
Select ringtone
to assign a ringtone to a calendar
event notification.
12. Tap
Vibration
to set the Event notification tone to
vibrate.
13. Tap
Default reminder time
to assign a default time
frame for event reminders.
14. Tap
Notifications while screen is off
to display
notifications on the full screen while it is turned off.
15. Tap
Quick responses
to select quick responses to
emailing guests.
16. Tap
Swipe with two fingers
to change the way events
are displayed when swiped.
Camera
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take
videos. For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 97.
ChatON
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations
between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to
“ChatON” on page 118.
183
Clock
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.
Alarm
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific
time.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Alarm
➔
Create alarm
. The following options
display:
•Time
: tap
(
Up
) or (
Down
)
to set the new time for the
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.
•Alarm repeat
: use this option to set the repeating status for the
alarm by tapping one the days that you want the alarm to
sound. Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm
repeat weekly.
•Alarm type
: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and
Briefing).
•More
: displays the following additional options:
–
Alarm volume
: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.
–
Alarm tone
: sets the sound file which is played when the
alarm is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional
options.
–
Location alarm
: when activated, the alarm only sounds
when you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on then follow the on-
screen instructions to enter a location.
–
Snooze
: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap
the ON/OFF slider to activate.
–
Smart alarm
: tracks body movements and calculates the
best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone
somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor
(also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work
from any part of the bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap
the ON/OFF slider to activate.
–
Name
: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.
2. Tap
Save
to store the alarm details.
ON
Applications 184
Turning Off an Alarm
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the
icon to the right.
Setting the Snooze Feature
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and sweep the icon to the left. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,
refer to “Alarm” on page 183.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Alarm
➔
➔
Delete
.
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap
Select all
to delete all alarms.
3. Tap
Delete
.
World Clock
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around
the world.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
World Clock
. The clock for your time zone is displayed.
2. Tap
Add city
to add another city to the World Clock.
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to
enter a city to search for.
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will
display.
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,
then tap
DST settings
.
6. Select
Automatic
,
Off
, or
1 hour
.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on
the World Clock listing will appear.
Z
Z
185
Deleting a World Clock Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
World Clock
➔
➔
Delete
.
2. Press and hold the city clocks you wish to delete.
3. Tap
Delete
.
Stopwatch
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Stopwatch
.
2. Tap
Start
to start the stopwatch and tap
Lap
to mark a
unit of time per lap.
3. Tap
Stop
to stop the stopwatch.
4. Tap
Restart
to continue or tap
Reset
to erase all times
recorded.
Timer
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer
to count down to an event based on a preset time length
(hours, minutes, and seconds).
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Timer
.
2. The
Minutes
field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.
3. Tap the
Hours
field to set hours if desired. As you tap
different fields, they will become highlighted.
4. Tap the
Seconds
field to set seconds.
5. Tap
Start
to begin the timer and tap
Stop
to pause the
timer.
6. After stopping, tap
Restart
to continue or tap
Reset
to
set the timer back to the original setting.
Desk clock
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,
and weather conditions when it is docked.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Desk clock
.
The default Desk clock is displayed.
2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.
3. To make changes, tap
➔
Settings
.
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen
mode:
Applications 186
•Hide status bar
: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden
from view.
• Wallpaper
: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,
Gallery, or Same as home screen.
•Calendar
: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap
to uncheck.
• AccuWeather
: when this is activated, the location,
temperature, and weather condition is displayed. Touch and
slide the slider to the right to turn it on .
•Brightness
: sets your Desk clock brightness by dragging the
slider bar to the desired level.
•Dock
: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display, and
HDMI Audio output.
Contacts
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can
be sorted by name, entry, or group.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address
Book” on page 73.
DeviceHelp
DeviceHelp provides online information to help with your
device questions.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
DeviceHelp
.
The
AT&T Device Help
screen is displayed.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions for accessing helpful
information.
Downloads
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your
downloads from the Play Store and the Browser.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Downloads
.
All of your downloads are listed.
2. Tap the
Internet downloads
tab to see all of the
downloads you have made from the Browser.
3. Tap the
Other downloads
tab to see all other
downloads.
4. Tap
Sort by size
to see your downloads sorted in size
order.
ON
187
5. Tap
Sort by date
to see your downloads sorted in time
order.
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive message alerts when
you receive an important email. For more information, refer
to “Using Email” on page 113.
Flipboard
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,
photos from friends and much more.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Flipboard
.
2. Tap
Get started
, select some on-screen categories and
tap
Done
to create a new profile.
– or –
Tap
Sign In
to log into your previously created profile.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to
“Gallery” on page 94.
Gmail
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more
information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 115.
Google
The Google Search application is the same on-screen
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on
your main Home screen. For more information, refer to
“Google Search Bar” on page 34.
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Applications 188
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer
to “Google +” on page 117.
Internet
Open the web browser to start surfing the web. The browser
is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone. For
more information, refer to “Internet” on page 157.
Kies air
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi
network. For more information, refer to “Kies air” on page
172.
Latitude
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your
location.
You must first set up your phone to use wireless networks to
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when
Wi-Fi is enabled.
1. Log on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Latitude
.
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 40
meters.
Sharing your Location with Friends
1. From the Latitude map screen, tap
FRIENDS LIST
to
display your Latitude friends. At first, only your name is
displayed.
2. Tap .
3. Tap
Select from Contacts
or
Add via email address
.
4. Tap a contact or enter an email address and tap
Add
friends
.
5. At the
Send sharing requests
prompt, tap
Yes
.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with
your location marked on a map. They will also receive
instructions on how to view your location from the web
or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is
available. Once they acknowledge your request, their
location will display on your phone. They can share
their location from their computer, phone, or tablet. For
more information, go to
http://www.google.com/latitude
.
6. To view the map, tap
MAP VIEW
.
+
189
Latitude Options
From the map display, press to display the
following options:
•Clear Map
: allows you to remove all markings and layers from
the map.
• Make available offline
: allows you to save a selected area to
you My places folder where you can view it later.
•Search
: allows you to search for a place of interest.
•Directions
: displays navigation directions to a location from a
starting point.
•Layers
: Layers are additional items that you can have
displayed on your map. They include Traffic, Satellite, Terrain,
Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.
• Settings
: the following Latitude options are available:
–
Display
: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar
on the screen.
–
Offline and cache
: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map
tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the
map tiles.
–
Location settings
: allows you to manage the settings for your
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude
location sharing, and Check-ins.
–
Labs
: this is a testing ground for experimental features that
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.
–
What’s New
: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store
and update your app.
–
About
: displays general information about Google maps such
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,
Free memory, etc.
–
Feedback
: allows you to send feedback to Google.
–
Terms, Privacy & Notices
: displays the Terms and Conditions,
Privacy Policy, Legal Notices information, and Web History.
Select the desired information from the pop-up menu.
•Help
: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you
can receive help on Google Maps.
Applications 190
Local
Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own
locations.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Local
.
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a
particular business.
All of the business categories that are close to you will
be displayed.
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews
from around the web and from Google users.
Maps
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and
satellite maps and local business information, including
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You
can also post public messages about a location and track
your friends.
Important!
Before using Google Maps you must have at least
an active data (3G) connection. The Maps
application does not cover every country or city.
Enabling a Location Source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To
enable the location source you must enable the wireless
network, or enable the GPS satellites.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Location services
.
2. Tap the
Use GPS satellites
field. A green checkmark will
display next to the field.
Note:
Selecting
Use GPS satellites
allows you to locate places
of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires
a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
inside a building or between buildings
•
in a tunnel or underground passage
191
•
in poor weather
•
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
in a vehicle with tinted windows
Using Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Maps
.
A map will display with your location in the very center.
2. Press to display the following options:
•Clear Map
: allows you to remove all markings and layers from
the map.
• Make available offline
: allows you to save a selected area to
you My places folder where you can view it later.
• Settings
: the following Map options are available:
–
Display
: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar
on the screen.
–
Offline and cache
: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map
tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the
map tiles.
–
Location settings
: allows you to manage the settings for your
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude
location sharing, and Check-ins.
–
Labs
: this is a testing ground for experimental features that
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.
–
What’s New
: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store
and update your app.
–
About
: displays general information about Google maps such
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,
Free memory, etc.
–
Feedback
: allows you to send feedback to Google.
–
Terms, Privacy & Notices
: displays the Terms and Conditions,
Privacy Policy, Legal Notices information, and Web History.
Select the desired information from the pop-up menu.
•Help
: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you
can receive help on Google Maps.
Media Hub
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie
and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For
more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 86.
Applications 192
Messages
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and
voicemail messages together into a single conversation
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more
information, refer to “Messages App” on page 118.
Messaging
You can send and receive different types of messages. For
more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 106.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page
117.
Mobile Hotspot
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For
more information, refer to “Tethering & portable hotspot” on
page 125.
Music Hub
The Music Hub app lets you upload your music collection to
the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive
catalog, and listen to personal radio. For more information,
refer to “Music Hub” on page 88.
Music Player
Music Player allows you to play music files that you have
stored on your phone and memory card. You can also create
playlists. For more information, refer to “Music Player” on
page 89.
My Files
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in
one convenient location.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
My Files
➔
All
files
.
2. Tap
sdcard0
to see the contents of your internal SD
card.
3. The following folders may display:
•Alarms
: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.
•Android
: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android
applications.
193
•Application
: this folder contains app info for S Memo.
•Bluetooth
: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
•DCIM
: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken
by the device. Tap
DCIM
➔
Camera
to view the picture or
video files. For more information, refer to
“Viewing Pictures”
on page 95. Also, see
“Viewing Videos”
on page 95.
•Download
: this folder contains downloads you have made.
•Movies
: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.
•Music
: this folder contains your Music files.
• Notifications
: this folder contains all of the notifications you
have received.
•Pictures
: this folder contains your photos.
•Podcasts
: this folder contains all of your podcasts.
•Ringtones
: this folder contains any ringtones you have
purchased.
•S Note
: this folder contains all the the S Notes you have written.
Note:
Different folders may appear depending on how your
phone is configured.
4. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap
extSdCard
to see the contents of your external SD card (memory
card).
myAT&T
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change
your rate plan.
Note:
The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to
download the updated application from the Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap
Update
. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 197.
Initial Setup
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
myAT&T
.
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an
account, see “Creating a New Google Account” on
page 13.
3. After signing into your Google Account, the Play Store
displays the
myAT&T
application. Tap the application.
4. Tap
Update
.
Applications 194
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using myAT&T
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
myAT&T
.
The
myAT&T
page is displayed.
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap
Accept
to
continue.
3. Enter your
User ID
and
Password
using the onscreen
keypad, then tap
Login
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Navigation
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.
Note:
For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-
speech support from the Play Store.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
inside a building or between buildings
•
in a tunnel or underground passage
•
in poor weather
•
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
in a vehicle with tinted windows
Launching Navigation
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Navigation
.
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap
Accept
to continue or
Don’t accept
to exit.
3. Select one of the following options:
• Speak destination
: allows you to speak your destination.
• Type destination
: allows you to use the keypad to enter your
destination.
•Go home
: takes you to your home address. The first time you
are prompted to enter it.
•Map
: takes you to the map location of your present location
using GPS.
• Recent Destinations
: allows you to access information on
previous destinations you have used. This option only appears
after you have entered one or more destinations.
195
Navigation Options
The map displays with your location in the center.
Press for the following options:
• Set Destination
: displays the Choose Destination screen
where you can speak or type your destination.
•Search
: allows you to speak or type a destination, place, or
service to search for.
•Layers
: are additional items that you can have displayed on
your map. They include:
–
Traffic view
: displays real-time traffic conditions so you can
plan the fastest route.
–
Satellite
: allows you to see you the map as a satellite image.
–
Parking
: allows you to see registered parking areas.
–
Gas stations
: allows you to see registered gas stations.
–
ATMs & banks
: allows you to see registered ATMs and Banks.
–
Restaurants
: allows you to see registered restaurants.
• Settings
: includes the following options:
–
Screen Dimming
: set this option to dim the screen between
instructions in order to conserve battery power.
–
Terms, privacy & notices
: displays Terms and Conditions for
Google mobile products, the Google Privacy Policy, and Google
legal notices.
• Exit Navigation
: exits the Navigation application and returns
you to the Application Menu screen.
•Help
: takes you to the Google Mobile Help web page.
Obtaining Driving Directions
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-
time driving directions to selected locations or
establishments based on your current location.
Using a Physical Address
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Navigation
.
2. Tap either
Speak Destination
or
Type Destination
.
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and
State using the keypad. As you type, possible
addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see
the address you want.
The route will be displayed.
Applications 196
4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is
displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to
install text-to-speech support from the Play Store. Tap
Install
to install the application or tap
Skip
to exit.
Note:
You will need to be signed on to your Google account
before downloading applications from the Play Store. For
more information, refer to “Creating a New Google
Account” on page 13.
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you
will receive voice-guided navigation directions.
Paper Artist
Paper Artist provides access to an in-device graphics
program. You can start from an empty canvas or import a
picture from your Gallery to get you started.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Paper Artist
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Phone
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer
to “Call Functions” on page 49.
Play Books
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the
eBookstore.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Books
.
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play
Books application.
Play Magazines
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your
phone at any time or any place.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Magazines
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon to
browse the full catalog.
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap
Accept
.
197
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and
subscribe.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a
magazine.
Play Movies & TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time. For more information, refer to “Play Movies &
TV” on page 94.
Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC. For more information, refer to “Google
Play Music” on page 92.
Play Store
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.
For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 115.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Play Store
.
2. Sign in to your Google account.
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of
Service will be displayed. Tap
Accept
to continue or
Decline
to exit.
4. Tap
Apps
,
Games
, or
AT&T
to download or purchase
games or applications. You can also download updates
to existing applications.
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.
Polaris Office 4.0
Polaris® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a central
place for managing your documents online or offline. The
application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
Applications 198
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Polaris Office 4.0
.
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch
Done
to complete the process.
– or –
Touch
Skip
to ignore this registration.
The main Polaris Office screen displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office.
S Note
Use this application to create notes with productivity tools
that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn
shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
S Note
.
2. Read the information at the
Learn about application
pop-up and tap
OK
.
3. Tap ➔
Tutorial
from the main S Note screen to
learn more about the application, then follow the on-
screen instructions.
S Suggest
This application provides on-screen recommendations for
applications that are specifically supported and made for use
on your device.
Note:
Access to this feature requires that you already be
logged in to your Samsung account application. For
more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 12.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
S Suggest
.
2. Read the terms and conditions.
3. Place a check mark in the
Agree
field then tap
Agree
.
4. Select an application from one of the available
categories (Picks, Categories, Games, Friends, and
Info.
5. Follow the on-screen download and installation
instructions.
199
S Voice
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to
perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
S Voice
.
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap
Confirm
to
continue.
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap
Agree
to
continue.
4. Read the information on the
About S Voice
screen, then
tap
Next
.
5. Read the information on the
Say what you want
screen,
then tap
Next
.
6. Read the information on the
Wake up S Voice
screen,
then tap
Next
.
7. Read the information on the
Handwriting
screen, then
tap
Next
.
8. Read the information on the
Edit what you said
screen,
then tap
Next
.
9. Read the information on the
Help
screen, then tap
Finish
.
10. At the S Voice screen, say “Hi Galaxy” to wake up
S voice.
11. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Settings
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 121.
Talk
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your
Gmail accounts. For more information, refer to “Google Talk”
on page 116.
Applications 200
Video Player
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
memory card. For more information, refer to “Video Player”
on page 93.
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately share it using
AllShare Play, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording
time will vary based on the available memory within the
phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Voice Recorder
.
2. To start recording, tap
Record
and speak into the
microphone.
3. During the recording process you can either tap
Stop
to stop and save the recording or
Pause
to
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap
Record
to resume recording. Once the audio
recording has stopped, the message is automatically
saved. Tap
Cancel
to cancel the recording
without saving.
4. Tap
List
to display a list of all your voice
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.
5. Press
to display the following options:
•Share via
: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete
: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap
the recordings to delete and tap
Delete
.
•Settings
: the following settings are available:
–
Storage
: allows you to choose where your recordings will be
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.
–
Recording quality
: allows you to set the recording quality to
High or Normal.
–
Limit for MMS
: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can
be sent in a message.
–
Contextual filename
: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to
adjust the filename based on contextual information such as
your current GPS location.
201
–
Default name
: allows you to choose the name prefix for your
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,
etc.
•End
: allows you to close the application.
Voice Search
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the
web using only your voice.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Voice Search
.
2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak
the word or words that you would like to search for on
the internet.
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words
that you would like to search for on the internet.
Results are displayed on your phone.
4. The following options are available at the bottom of
your screen:
•
Web
: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the
original search results.
•
Images
: Displays images for your search.
•
Places
: Displays places and businesses in your local area
pertaining to your search.
•
More
: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see
additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs,
Discussions, and Books.
YouTube
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide
variety of user-generated video content, including movie
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other
original videos.
Note:
YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional
data charges.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
YouTube
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,
scroll down to browse through the main page
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional
options.
Applications 202
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or
tap the title link.
To watch a high quality video:
Press and then tap
Settings
➔
General
➔
High
quality on mobile
.
To configure YouTube Settings:
Press and then tap
Settings
and configure the
following parameters:
•General
–
High quality on mobile
, when enabled, allows you to start all
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
network.
–
Caption font size
allows you to set the font size used by on-
screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.
–
Uploads
specifies network preferences for uploads.
•Search
–
Clear search history
allows you to clear previous YouTube
searches from showing up in the YouTube search box.
–
SafeSearch filtering
allows you to configure block settings for
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.
• Preloading
–
Preload subscriptions
allows you to preload (or go get videos
while on Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.
–
Preload watch later
allows you to enable the preload function
on selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data
usage information and tap
OK
to accept the terms.
Note:
Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your
device’s storage space and may result in additional
charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.
• About
–
Help
: provides answers to most YouTube questions.
–
Feedback
: allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
–
Google Mobile Terms of Service
: displays the Google Mobile
Terms of Service.
–
YouTube Terms of Service
: displays the YouTube terms of
Service.
203
–
Google Mobile Privacy Policy
: displays the Google Mobile
Privacy Policy.
–
YouTube Privacy Policy
: displays the YouTube Privacy Policy.
–
Open source licenses
: displays the Open source licenses
–
App version
: displays the software version for the current
YouTube application.
Note:
It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
additional options, access the page via the Web browser
and tap
Sign in
at the top right corner, enter your
YouTube or Google username and password, and tap
Sign in
.
YPmobile
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your
search in real-time.
Note:
The first time you use YP, you will need to download the
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play
Store page displays, tap
Update
or
Install
then follow the
onscreen instructions. For more information, refer to
“Play Store” on page 197.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
YPmobile
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap
Accept
to continue.
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap
OK
to allow
YPmobile to use your current location.
5. Tap the
Find a business nearby!
field.
6. Enter information in the
What:
and
Near:
fields and tap
Search
.
7. Results will be displayed.
8. Tap to see the locations marked with pins on the
map.
Applications 204
9. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it
outwards to zoom in.
10. Tap a pin to read information about the location.
11. Tap
to display additional options.
205
Section 11: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone.
Read this
information before using your mobile device
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
Health and Safety Information 206
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
207
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/
.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
•
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
•
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
•
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
Health and Safety Information 208
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect
the public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone.
209
Studies have shown that these products generally do not
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
•
FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
•
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
•
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
•
World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
•
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
•
Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
Health and Safety Information 210
•
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety
to give additional protection to the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
211
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
Equipment Authorization for this mobile phone with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this
model phone as reported to the FCC are:
•
Head: 0.32 W/kg.
•
Body-worn: 1.44 W/kg.
FCC Radio Frequency Emission
This phone meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission
Guidelines.
FCC ID: A3LSGHI317
More information on the phone's SAR can be found from the
following FCC website:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
accessed online on the FCC's website through
http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html
. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional
SAR information can also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-
cellular-telephones
.
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
Health and Safety Information 212
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility.
Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired
. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
•
Use a hands-free device;
•
Secure your phone within easy reach;
•
Place calls when you are not moving;
•
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
•
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
213
•
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
•
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to
http://www.ctia.org
.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage
. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
•
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery
. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
•
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
Health and Safety Information 214
•
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source
. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
•
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire
. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
•
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery
. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
•
Avoid dropping the cell phone
. Dropping the phone or the
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
•
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way
.
•
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects
. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
Important!
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with
Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard
.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
chargers.
215
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers
.
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
•
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
hazard
.
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these
locations may be found at:
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm
or at
http://www.call2recycle.org/
.
Health and Safety Information 216
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.
Just go to
http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=ST
A_recyle_your_phone_page
and follow the instructions to
print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your
old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.
Mail, for recycling.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
Warning!
Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
217
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.
GPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
•
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
Health and Safety Information 218
•
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
responder instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
time. In some areas, complete information may not be
available.
Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap . The dialer is
displayed.
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
4. Tap the key.
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
219
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and
could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the
mobile device.
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent
proper operation.
Responsible Listening
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss
.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
Health and Safety Information 220
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
•
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
•
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
•
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
•
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
221
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Health and Safety Information 222
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
•
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
•
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
•
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
•
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
•
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
For more information see:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-
faqs.html#
.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
223
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station).
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle engine.
When your Device is Wet
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it
to a service center.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive
hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
Health and Safety Information 224
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
M-Ratings
: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not
operate in telecoil mode.
T-Ratings
: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in
telecoil mode.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
is relatively immune to interference noise.
Under the current industry standard, American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equals M5.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would
indicate excellent performance.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.
225
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids.
It is important to try the different features of this phone
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult
your service provider or phone retailer.
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with
M3 + M2 = 5
T3 + T2 = 5
Health and Safety Information 226
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved in this document could void your
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the
mobile device.
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
•
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
•
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
•
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
•
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static
electricity before inserting the headset.
•
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
•
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
•
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
227
•
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
•
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
•
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
immediately.
•
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
•
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
Warranty Information 228
Section 12: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product.
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
Phone 1 Year
Batteries 1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year
229
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product.
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
Warranty Information 230
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
231
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
Warranty Information 232
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center
for details.
Important!
Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
233
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All
rights reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung Electronics Co.") for
software, owned by Samsung Electronics Co. and its
affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and
licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes
computer software and may include associated media,
printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation
("Software").
Samsung Electronics Co. is a separate company
from the company that provides the limited warranty for this
mobile device, Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC.
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS,
DO NOT USE
THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE
RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung Electronics Co. grants you
the following rights provided that you comply with all terms
and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access,
display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard
disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer
and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile
device at a time, and you may not make the Software
available over a network where it could be used by multiple
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the
Software in machine readable form for backup purposes
only; provided that the backup copy must include all
copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the
original.
Warranty Information 234
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
Electronics Co. reserves all rights not expressly granted to
you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and
other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung
Electronics Co. or its suppliers own the title, copyright and
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The
Software is licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung
Electronics Co. and its affiliates may collect and use
technical information gathered as part of the product support
services related to the Software provided to you, if any.
Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may use this
information solely to improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you and will not
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies
you.
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that
Samsung Electronics Co. may provide to you or make
available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of
the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such
upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must
first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung
Electronics Co. as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading,
you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for
your upgrade eligibility.
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
235
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung Electronics Co. if you fail to comply
with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon
termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the
Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the
Software.
9. Disclaimer of Warranty. ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS
PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR
ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS
DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OF WARRANTY
REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY
OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.
10. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. Samsung Electronics Co. makes no
representations whatsoever about any of these applications.
Since Samsung Electronics Co. has no control over such
applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung
Electronics Co. is not responsible for the availability of such
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or
available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge
and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole
Warranty Information 236
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you
to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use
is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and
other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its
products and services. You agree that Samsung Electronics
Co. shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for
any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by, or in
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party
content, products, or services available on or through any
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of
any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.
DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF
INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
11. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party
Applications. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING
THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY,
ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE
USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., IS
DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN
DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE
FOR ANY DAMAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH
THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING
WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY
ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD
PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE
237
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN
THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR
THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE
CORRECTED. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR
ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO
ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD
PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.
12. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING
OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS
OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG
ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL
Warranty Information 238
LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR
ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS
MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, 11 AND 12) SHALL APPLY TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
13. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
14. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application
of which is expressly excluded.
15. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the
parties.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG
ELECTRONICS CO. ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not
be combined or consolidated with any other person's or
entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation
of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed
as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted
before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in
form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The
239
arbitration shall be conducted according to the American
Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules
applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is
entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For
any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or
less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award
your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs
as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung Electronics
Co. its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is
determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a
Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than
half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or
$50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung
Electronics Co. shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim")
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
Samsung Electronics Co.'s employees, representatives and
affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of
the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution
procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co. no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first
consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-
987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of
Warranty Information 240
the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and
providing the same information. These are the only two
forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute
resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution
procedure will not affect your use of the device or its
preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co.
relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals
and representations with respect to the Software or any other
subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this
EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the
other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.
[101212]
241
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration
Register now at
www.samsung.com/register
Get More
• Latest info on promotions, events and special oers on related products
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion
• Great deals on downloads
Sign Up Now
Customize your Samsung device experience
• Activate product warranty
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account
• No monthly fees
Scan this code to go
directly to the registration page.
242
Index
A
Abc mode 68
About Device 154
Accounts 148
Add accounts 148
Adding a New Contact
Idle Screen 74
Address Book 73
Adding a New Contact 74
Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers 75
Copying a contact to the Phone 84
Copying Contacts to Phone 84
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 83
Deleting Address Book Entries 85
Deleting Contacts from SIM card
84
Dialing a Number 76
Favorites 83
Finding an Address Book Entry 77
Group Settings 82
Managing Address Book Contacts
83
Service Dialing Numbers 85
Using Contacts List 76
Address Book Options 80
Adobe PDF 197
Airplane mode 123, 131
Alarm 183
AllShare
Definitions 174
AllShare Cast 129
AllShare Play 174
Configuring Settings 176
Group Cast 177
Sharing Media 177
AllShareCast Hub 175
Applications
Using the Camcorder 102
Using the Camera 97
World Clock 184
Applications settings
allow mock locations 154
managing 135
running services 135
AT&T Code Scanner 178
AT&T FamilyMap 179
AT&T Locker 179
AT&T Music
Playlists 91
AT&T Navigator 179
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 167
B
Back key 34
Battery
charging 9
Installing 7
Low Battery Indicator 11
Battery Use & Safety 213
Bigger Font
Setting 152
Blocking Mode 130
On 130
Bluetooth
Outgoing Headset Condition 62
243
Sending contacts 171
Books
Play Books 196
C
Calculator 180
Calendar 181
Call Functions 49
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
58
Address Book 52
Adjusting the Call Volume 56
Answering a Call 52
Call Back Missed Call 54
Call Duration 56
Call Log 53
Call Waiting 60
Correcting the Number 50
Dialing a Recent Number 50
Ending a Call 50
International Call 49
Making a Call 49
Manual Pause Dialing 49
Options During a Call 56
Putting a Call on Hold 57
Saving a recent call number to
Address Book 54
Searching for a Number in
Address Book 60
Using the Speakerphone 59
Viewing All Calls 53
Viewing Missed Calls 53
Camcorder 102
Camcorder Options 103
Shooting Video 102
Camcorder Options
Camcorder Options after a Video is
Taken 105
Camera 97
Camera Options 98
Lock Screen Shortcut 137
Taking Pictures 97
Camercorder
Taking Pictures During Video 103
Care and Maintenance 218
Changing Your Settings 121
Charging battery 9
ChatON 118
Adding a Buddy 119
Register 118
Using 119
Children and Cell Phones 209
Clock 137, 183
Code Scanner 178
Contacts 73
Cookies
Emptying 161
Creating a Playlist 91
D
Developer Options 154
Dialing Options 53
Display
icons 23
Using Negative Colors 153
Display / Touch-Screen 217
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
205
Downloads 186
Draft Messages 107
E
Email 113
Creating a Corporate Email
Account 114
244
Creating Additional Email
Accounts 114
Switching Between Email
Accounts 115
Emergency Calls 218
Making 50
With SIM 50
Without SIM 50
Entering Text 67
Changing the Text Entry Mode 68
Using 123Sym Mode 69
Using Abc Mode 68
Using Swype 70, 71
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 69
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 205
F
Facebook
Swpe Connect 145
Family Map 179
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 223
FCC Notice and Cautions 225
Featured Apps 187
Flipboard 187
Font Size
Caption 202
Changing 152
G
Gallery 94
viewing pictures 95
viewing videos 95
Gestures
Browse Image 36, 150
Overview 35
Screen Capture 37, 150
Shake to Update 36, 150
Tilt to Zoom 36, 149
Getting Started 6
Setting Up Your Phone 6
Voice mail 13
Gmail 115
Personalize Swype 145
Google Chrome 183
Google Maps 190
Google Play Music 92
Google Voice Typing 70
Google voice typing settings 143
GPS 217
Group
Adding a contact 82
Editing 82
Removing a contact 82
Group Cast 177
Group Settings
Editing a Caller Group 82
H
Handwriting feature 70
Health and Safety Information 205
Home City
Setting 137
Home key 34
Hotspot Guru 168
Hotspots 168
I
Icons
Application 27
Indicator 23
Icons, description 23
In-Call Options 56
Incognito 159
Create Window 159
245
Exit Window 159
Information Ticker 137
Ink Effect
Lock Screen 137
International Call 49
Internet 157
J
Joining Contacts 78
K
Keyboard Input Methods 142
Keyboard settings 143
Keypad
Changing Text Input 68
Kies via Wi-Fi 125
L
Landscape 67
Language and input 142
Language and keyboard settings
select locale 142
Latitude 188
Local 190
Location services settings 136
Lock Screen
Camera Quick Access 138
Clock 137
Dual Clock 137
Ripple Effect 137
Say Wake-Up Command 138
Shortcuts 137
Ticker 137
Weather 137
M
Maps 190
Media Hub 31, 86
Memory Card 47
Memory Card Installation 8
Menu
key 34
Menu Navigation 34
Message
Reply 120
Message Options 107
Message Search 111
Messaging
Adding a Signature 113
Block Unknown Senders 113
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 106
Deleting a message 110
Draft 107
Gmail 115
Handwriting 70
Locked 108
Options 107
Scheduled Messages 108
Settings 111
Signing into Email 113
Signing into Gmail 115
Spam 108
Split View 111
Types of Messages 106
Messenger 117, 192
microSD card 8, 47
Installing 8
Removing 8
microSDHC card 8, 47
Mobile Hotspot 125
Mobile Web 157
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 158
246
Navigating with the Mobile Web
157
Using Bookmarks 159
Mono
Audio Setup 153
Movies 94
Multimedia 86
Music File Extensions
3GP 89
AAC 89
AAC+ 89
eAAC+ 89
M4A 89
MP3 89
MP4 89
WMA 89
Music Hub 88
Making a Purchase 89
Music Player 89
adding music 92
creating a playlist 91
removing music 92
Mute 57, 60
My Files 192
myAT&T 193
N
Navigation 194
command keys 34
context-sensitive menus 35
terms used 34
touch gestures 34
Navigation Options 195
Navigator 179
Negative Colors 153
NFC 173
On 95
O
One-handed operation 142
Operating Environment 221
Other Important Safety Information
226
Owner information 138
P
Page buddy 132
PC Connections 171
Pen Settings 150
Phone
Front View 16
icons 23
Rear View 18
Side View 17
Switching On/Off 11
Phone information 154
Pictures 94
Gallery 94
Sharing 95
Places 196
Play Books 196
Play Movies & TV 94
Play Music 92
Play Store 197
Pointer speed 147
Polaris Office 4.0 197
Polaris® Office 32, 197
Powering
Off 11
On 11
Privacy settings
factory data reset 148
Q
QWERTY keypad 67
247
R
Ready2Go 12
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 208
Reject list 55
Reset
factory data 148
Responsible Listening 219
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 225
Ripple 137
Ripple Effect
Lock Screen 137
S
S Beam
On 95
Sharing Multiple Pictures 96
Sharing Pictures 95
S Note 198
S Pen
Functionality 19
Settings 150
S Suggest 198
S Voice 199
Set Wake-Up Command 138
SafeSearch
Filtering 202
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-
cling 215
scientific calculator 181
Screen Capture 37, 150, 178
SD Card 47
Security 147
Security settings
device administration 140
trusted credentials 140
Service Dialing Numbers 85
Settings 121
Shortcuts 23
SIM card
installation 7
Installing 6
Smart Practices While Driving 212
Smart Wi-Fi 167
Snooze 184
Software Update 155
Spam
Block Unknown Senders 113
Manually Register a Number 113
Register a Phrase 113
Settings 113
Spam Messages 108
Assigning 108
Speakerphone Key 59
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi-
fication Information 210
Standard Limited Warranty 228
Stopwatch 185
Swap 58
SWYPE
entering text using 70, 71
Swype
Cellular Data 146
Connect 145
Contribute Data Usage 146
Personal Dictionary 146
Preferences 145
Updates 146
Swype Keypad Settings 144
Swype Settings 72
Symbol/Numeric mode 69
248
Synchronization settings
auto-sync 136
T
T9 Trace 143
Tethering 125
Text Input
Abc mode 68
Methods 67
numeric mode 69
symbol mode 69
Timer 185
Automatic Answering 62
Touch Screen 12
Lock/Unlock 12
Transferring Large Files 95
Travel Charger 9
Using 10
TTY Mode 65
Twitter
Personalize Swype 145
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 216
Understanding Your Phone 15
Features of Your Phone 15
Front View 16
Rear View 18
Side Views 17
Unmute 57
USB settings
mass storage device 172
USB Tethering 125
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites 160
Deleting a Favorite 160
Editing Favorites 160
V
Video Player 93
Voice Mail
Accessing 14
From Another Phone 14
Setup 13
Voice Recorder 200
Volume 131
W
Warranty Information 228
Weather
Setting 137
Web 157
Widgets
Calculator 28
Camera 28
Email 29
Gmail 29, 187
Settings 33, 199
Video Player 33
Voice Recorder 33, 200
YouTube 33
Wi-Fi 164
using Kies via Wi-Fi 129
Wi-Fi Direct 166
World Clock
Deleting an Entry 185
World clock 184
Y
YouTube 201
High Quality 202
SafeSearch Filtering 202
Settings 202
YPmobile (Yellowpages mobile) 203

Navigation menu